JP6677881B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko related to gaming machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters a starting port on a game board surface (game area). ) State, pachinko gaming machines that can open a large winning prize port provided on the game board surface and obtain a large amount of prize balls are mainstream. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this way, there is a probability varying gaming state in which the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is increased, and a time reducing gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is increased. There are also gaming machines that have a game progress state that creates an advantageous game progress state for the player based on these game states, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

JP-A-2005-31267 JP 2011-45518 JP 2008-167875

  However, since there have been many such gaming machines, there is a problem that the development of a model that realizes a more novel gaming property is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2);
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
Based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port (2) A10-2), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying information;
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identifying information is variably displayed on the second identifying information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning prize) is provided until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game A control means (for example, a small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game A for once executing a unit game which can make the mouth C20) an advantageous state for the player;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, the first grand prize) until a predetermined number of entering balls or a specific time elapses. Special game B control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game B for executing the unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth C10) an advantageous state for the player,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
Easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state A and easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state B Are configured to have the same gender,
Even during the variable display of the first identification information, the variable display of the second identification information can be started, and even during the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the first identification information can be started,
When a game ball is fired toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the unit time per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed The number of game balls fired becomes the first number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
After the lottery state B and the fluctuating state B, the special game A is executed to the player until the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the lottery state B and the fluctuating state B. The expected value related to the number of awarded balls to be given is executed based on that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B. It is configured not to exceed the maximum value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the special game B ,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, the variable display time of the second identification information is the second identification information in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B. Is configured to be relatively longer than the variable display time of the second identification information when stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group during the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the second identification information is forcibly stopped. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, further novel gaming properties can be realized in a gaming machine adopting a concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to a player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a small hit game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification example of the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is an operation diagram of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 39 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 44 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 46 is an operation diagram of the second winning port of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 50 is a table configuration diagram used in a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 54 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a right-handing instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a small hit game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the limited frequency shift determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 62 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a right-handing instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the prefetching process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the initial seconds determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the effect mode switching process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the high-profit-state effect display processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of a special game related display control process in the high profit state on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 92 is an operational diagram relating to the second winning port of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 93 is an operation diagram of the electric accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the distribution role object control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the V winning opening ball entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of a right-handing instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect presentation control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 111 is an operation diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 113 is a table configuration diagram used in a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 114 is an example of a special winning opening opening pattern on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 117 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification example of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 118 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the non-probable change game state determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game state determination process at the time of the probability change on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 122 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of a special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the first post main game state determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the second main game state determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 3 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 3 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a flowchart of the other main game variation control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 3 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 3 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 4 from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification Example 1 from the ninth embodiment.

Forms for implementation

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entering a ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The “random number” is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a narrowly-defined random number (for example, a hard random number is used as a random number). Soft random numbers as random numbers and pseudo random numbers). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the result of a game, specifically, a “winning random number (a random number for winning or losing lottery)” related to the transition of a special game, and a variation mode (or variation time) of an identification symbol are determined. "Variation mode determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "symbol determining random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determining random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, a probability varying game) after a special game, and the like. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the definite identification information, and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be indicated in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. Is called one random number (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + symbol determining random number... Is referred to as one random number). . Further, for example, one kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, characters, and patterns. And the like. In this specification, the “identification information” may be referred to as a main game design / special design (special figure) or a decorative design (special design). The “decorative design (slot)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-game unit (so-called sub-board) side. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to a display method, and includes, for example, light emission (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) of light emission (not only emission or non-emission, color difference, lighting / flashing mode) ), Physical display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position), and the like. The “effect (information)” refers to all output contents that enhance the interest of the game whose output is controlled by the sub game unit (so-called sub board), and include, for example, fluctuation and stop of the decorative pattern and execution expectation of the special game. For example, a notice that suggests or informs the degree can be given, and the output form is a moving image such as an animation or a live-action image, a still image such as a picture, a photograph, a character, a sound, or an operation of a movable body for production. Aspects, or combinations thereof, may be mentioned. The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special game state, and a transition to the special game state from a non-probability varying game state in which a lottery probability is a predetermined value. A probability variation game state in which a lottery probability is high, a transition to a special game, an auxiliary game state in which there is assistance for winning a prize in the starting opening which is a trigger for a lottery (a so-called ordinary symbol time reduction state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting opening In such a case, the opening period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, and the time for reporting the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short. "The normal game state and the specific game state in which the easy ball game is easier to execute than the normal game state" refers to a situation in which the symbols of the auxiliary game symbols are constantly changed (for example, there is always a hold on the auxiliary game symbols. Is the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port in the case of In other words, when the variable member is attached to the starting port, for example, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), a normal symbol which is a trigger for opening the variable member (Auxiliary game symbol) winning probability (so-called ordinary high-probability state / low-probability state), and fluctuation time of normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers opening of the variable member (Iwayu) Hiroshizu variation shortening functions inoperative state, operating state) is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the change display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the change display period for each change display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the measured value. More specifically, in a case where it is configured to determine the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information, and when there are a plurality of types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”) based on the plurality of types of variable display periods, but if there is only one type of variable display period candidate to be selected, that type (Ie, both concepts are included). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of the loss, or a concept limited to only the average value of the change display period of the identification information at the time of hit (including so-called small hit time), or It may be a concept limited to only the variable display period having a high selection probability, that is, it is supplemented that the meaning of this wording is to use as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (accordingly, As a method for realizing the “average value of the variable display periods of the identification information”, the candidates of the variable display periods and / or the selection probabilities are different, or the candidates of the variable display periods and / or the selection probabilities are the same. There are also various methods such as changing the period value when adding a further variable display period, but the present invention is not limited to any of these methods.)

  The following embodiment is a model (a type 1 type 1 multifunction peripheral) in which a conventional type 1 pachinko game machine and a type 1 pachinko game machine are mixed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of the first type, the second type, the third type, general electric machines and the like, and gaming machines in which these are mixed). It is also within the range. Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on / off a flag, the name of a unit responsible for the processing of each step, and the like are described as an example. It is not limited to the following embodiments. In addition, it should not be understood that the above-described embodiments and modified examples are applied to specific ones in a limited manner, and any combination may be used. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification example and another modification example are described independently, the modification example It should be understood that combinations of the modifications and the other modifications are also described. In the present embodiment, a lottery table and a reference table exist for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications {for example, the winning probability at the time of executing a lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the time of a special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc. This is merely an example, and in particular, the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown under different conditions (for example, according to conditions for time-saving games and non-time-saving games, etc.) are described in the following embodiments and modifications. It should be understood that changes may be made as appropriate as long as they do not greatly deviate from.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine frames and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing a pachinko gaming machine at a position where the pachinko gaming machine is to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like, and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be openable and closable. The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending the game balls to the firing rail, extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22, and the like. The lower ball dish D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball dish D20 and the lower ball dish D22, and a sound effect according to a game state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In the game area D30, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning ports are provided. The special winning opening C10, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, the effect display device SG, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, the center decoration D38, and the out opening D36 are provided. Hereinafter, each element will be described in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are set as start winning ports corresponding to the main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting port A10 includes a first main game starting port entrance ball detection device A11s, and the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s. Prepare. Here, the first main game start port entrance detection device A11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first main game start port A10, and the first main game start port indicating the entry when the ball is entered. Generate entry information. The second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second main game start opening B10. Generate sphere information.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 includes an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game starting port entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10, and generates auxiliary game starting port entry information indicating the entry when entering the ball. I do. The entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). ) Is configured such that it is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) may be used. May be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a game ball flowing on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, and is hard to be guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the second main game start port B10, and is difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10. . Note that “easy to be guided” and “difficult to be guided” are determined, for example, by the number of entering balls when 10,000 game balls are fired on the right and left sides, respectively. The present invention is not limited to this. Only one main game start port is provided, and a game ball flowing on the left side (based on the center of the game area) and a game ball flowing on the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Both the ball and the ball may be configured to be easily guided to the main game start port.

  Here, in the present embodiment, game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10, while the game area D30 is set. The game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) is hardly guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10. That is, the game balls fired toward the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10 are less likely to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while being easily guided to the second main game start port B10. That is, the game balls fired toward the first main game start port A10 are configured to be less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be such that game balls fired toward the first main game start port A10 are easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10. (When only one main game start port is provided, the game ball guided to the one main game start port may be configured to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10).

  Next, a large winning opening C10 is provided at the upper right of the out mouth D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the gaming area D30 (with reference to the center of the gaming area) is provided before reaching the out mouth D36. It is configured to easily pass through the area where the special winning opening C10 is arranged.

  In addition, as will be described later, the special winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, and is formed at the upper right of the out opening D36. It is a winning port corresponding to the main game located. As a specific configuration, the special winning opening C10 includes a special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a special winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a special winning opening solenoid C13). . Here, the special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening C10, and generates special winning opening entering information indicating the entering when the ball enters. The special winning opening electric auditorium C11d changes the special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win in the special winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball can easily win (excites the special winning opening solenoid C13). To change). Note that, in the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is a mode in which the game ball is formed into a horizontal rectangular shape and is variable between a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easily won. It is not limited to. In this case, for example, an advancing state in which a square plate member provided in the special winning opening protrudes toward the player and a retreating state in which the member is retracted with respect to the player side can be adopted ( A so-called slide attacker, in which the large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can receive a game ball protruding from the game area D30 and flowing down the game area D30, and the square plate member is in an advanced state. When the receiving of the game ball to the box-shaped member is hindered, the big winning opening is closed, and when the member on the square plate is in the retracted state, the reception of the game ball to the box-shaped member is performed. Is allowed, the special winning opening is opened), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening C10 is a predetermined number (for example, 10). Further, by driving the end of the rod-shaped member left and right with respect to the player as a fulcrum, the game ball can be changed between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball can easily be won (a so-called tulip). (A type attacker) (the same can be said for the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 is a device that executes a display related to the first main game symbol corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g and a first main game symbol hold display unit A21h. In addition, the second main game symbol display device B20 is a device that executes a display and the like related to the second main game symbol corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game symbol display device B20 includes a second main game symbol display unit B21g and a second main game symbol hold display unit B21h. Here, the main game symbol hold display section A21h and the second main game symbol display section B21g are composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is determined by the hold number of the random number related to the main game (main not executed). (The number of fluctuations in game symbols). In addition, the main game symbol display part A21g is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the main game symbol is displayed by ten kinds of numbers “0” to “9” and a loss “−”. Is not limited, and it is preferable to display a symbol or the like using a 7-segment LED so as to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. Also, the display of the number of holds is not limited to the configuration of four lamps, but is configured to be able to display the number of hold of up to four lamps (for example, it is configured of one lamp, Equation 1: lighting, holding number 2: low-speed blinking, holding number 3: medium-speed flashing, holding number 4: high-speed blinking).

  In addition, since the main game symbol does not necessarily have to have a staging role, the size of the main game symbol display device A20 is set to be inconspicuous in this embodiment. However, when adopting a method of giving a staging role to the main game symbol itself and not displaying the decorative symbol, the main game symbol is displayed on a liquid crystal display such as a staging display device SG described later. May be configured.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the main game symbol, and the like. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is performed including a change display of a decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes, for example, a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations imitating a slot machine game, a first hold display section SG12 for displaying main game hold information, and A second hold display section SG13. Although the effect display device SG is constituted by a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be constituted by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 and the second hold display section SG13 each include four lamps, and these lamps are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display section H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lightings of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations held (the number of auxiliary game symbol fluctuations that have not been executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection and decoration of the effect display device SG. The game effect lamp D26 is provided in a region other than the game region D30 and / or the game region D30, and plays a role of rendering by blinking or the like.

  Next, a basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls the entire gaming operation (i.e., control that is directly related to the interests of the player) such as a lottery when the ball enters the main game starting port. Control board M, effect control means (sub main control unit) SM for performing display control and the like relating to various effects on effect display device SG for imparting interest to game contents, and sub-sub-control for mainly executing effect displays Prize ball payout including a section SS, a payout ball tank KT, a payout ball rail KR, and a payout unit KE10 that pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball plate D20 in accordance with a prize in each winning port. A device (set base) KE, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a launching device D42 for firing game balls (reserved balls) of the upper ball dish D20 into the game area D30 one by one. , Departure A launch control board D40 for controlling the launching operation of the device D42, a power supply unit E for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine, a power switch Ea for turning on / off the power of the pachinko gaming machine, and the like, The frame D14 is provided on the back surface (the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M for controlling the progress of the game and the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, and the like; A power supply unit E (power switch / button Ea may be provided on the unit) for supplying power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG, such as fluctuation and stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and advance notice display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided with a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU in advance, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, and the like) handled by the game is mounted. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate and device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M includes various winning opening sensors ｛the first main game starting opening ball detection device A11s, the second main game starting opening ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game starting opening ball detection device H11s, Winning opening winning detection device C11s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general entrance opening is always open irrespective of the execution of special games, etc., and there is a prize ball, but the symbol lottery etc.入, a driving solenoid (not shown) such as the above-described large winning opening solenoid C13, an information display LED (not shown), and the like, which are input / output devices essential for the progress of the game Each of the input devices is electrically connected to devices (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, auxiliary game peripheral device H, and first and second main game common peripheral devices C in the figure). Control the progress of the game based on the input signal from That. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control section SM / sub sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize ball payout. Is transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (command) relating to the progress state of the effect / game is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to a hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). Is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, as shown by the arrow in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (a communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by a player and that receives a request for renting a game ball, It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not described in detail, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (the launch control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the winning ball payout control board KH, and the winning ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 are provided. (A launch handle, a launch motor, a ball feeder, etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball rental device R is provided as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball rental device R may be integrated with the game machine. The control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be performed in an integrated manner.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern and the like, a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and a drive device for effect (not shown, but a so-called effect). Mobile object). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and the game effect ( Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be. In this embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, there is an advantage in that the structure is integrated so that space merits and a situation in which noise is mixed into wirings can be reduced. Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, such that the sound control is executed by the sub-sub-control unit SS (preferably when the sound control circuit is integrated with the VDP). Further, an electronic value may be provided without providing a physical prize ball as the prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M includes game peripheral devices related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, auxiliary game peripheral devices H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) relating to the effect is communicably connected to a prize ball payout control board KH which controls payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M. ing. The sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is also electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control section SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display section SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, and the like store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In addition, each unit that is hereinafter included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each unit to be included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each of the units (devices) will be described.

  First, the main control board M includes game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, game content determination means MN for determining the content of a game, and progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. , A game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state, etc., and various game information on the game peripheral device side, for example, stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol, for example. , 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, losing｝, information on change mode (for example, change time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc. (And a command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating untransmitted commands) and the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on winning of game balls to various winning ports. Has a prize balls paid out determination means MH, the.

  Here, the game information control unit MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the ball entry determination unit MJ10 for determining the inflow of a game ball into each entry port (starting port or the like). A random number acquisition determination executing means MJ20 for acquiring each of the random numbers based on the above, and a holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing a ball entering each starting port during the fluctuation display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the ball entry determining means MJ10 includes a first main game starting port entry determining means MJ11-A for determining whether a game ball has entered the first main game starting port A10, and a second main game starting port. A second main game starting port entering judgment means MJ11-B for judging whether a game ball has entered the ball B10, and an auxiliary game starting port for judging whether a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game starting port H10. It has a ball entry judging means MJ11-H and a special winning port ball judging means MJ11-C10 for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning port C10.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game-side random number based on the entry of a game ball into the first main game start port A10, and, in accordance with the determination result, To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for obtaining a random number (for example, a first winning random number, a first variation mode determining random number, a first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and to a second main game starting port B10 It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game-side random number based on the entering of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination executing means MJ21-B for obtaining a game symbol determination random number, and an auxiliary game random number for determining whether or not to obtain an auxiliary game side random number, and obtaining the random number based on the determination result. And acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H. That.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “65535” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. Further, the random numbers need not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of sequentially expressing the value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), or the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears ) Is determined by an accidental value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Next, the holding control means MJ30 controls the processing for holding and starting the change and the holding and controlling means MJ31, and the first main game-side random number acquired in a situation where the change permission of the first main game symbol has not been granted. And temporarily store the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the change permission of the first main game symbol is lowered based on the determination result. The main game symbol holding means MJ32-A determines whether or not to temporarily store the second main game-side random number acquired in a situation where the permission to change the second main game symbol has not been issued, and based on the determination result, The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding random numbers in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B until the second main game symbol change permission is lowered, and the auxiliary game symbol change permission Going down It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game-side random number acquired in the absence state is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the random number is held in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the change of the auxiliary game symbol is permitted. And an auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for playing.

  Here, the suspension digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j that determines whether a condition for starting a symbol fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H are capable of storing up to four random numbers and combining the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H for temporarily storing in the form of Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not to shift to the special game and whether or not to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, and whether or not the result of the determination as to whether or not the winning has been achieved. Based on a special game shift determining means MN20 for deciding to shift to a game (actuate a so-called condition device), a symbol content determining means MN40 for determining a stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, And a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time or the like) of each symbol. Here, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 includes a first main game winning / rejecting lottery means MN11-A for performing a winning / rejecting lottery on a first main game symbol, and a second main game winning / rejecting lottery means for performing a winning / rejecting lottery for a second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing success / failure lottery on the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery for the first main game symbol. A first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A, a second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a winning / rejecting lottery for a second main game symbol, and a winning / non-rejection lottery for an auxiliary game symbol. , Each of which has an auxiliary game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H which is referred to when performing the game. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 determines a stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number), and a first main game symbol determining means MN41-A. The second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining a stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determining random number (second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. And an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various types of lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success or failure. In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of the win / fail. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). MN51-A, and second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number). Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. In addition, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of the win / failure and the game state. Further, the second main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the fluctuation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that are different depending on the result of winning or the game state. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various types of winning tables that differ depending on the game state (for example, a normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, a probability variation game and a time reduction game → an auxiliary game time reduction lottery table). ).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time period on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for performing control to stop and display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance. It has auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for performing control to stop and display after changing the game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C that can be cleared to zero (for example, a decrement counter that is decremented at predetermined intervals. In the following, a counter similar to a timer can be implemented by a similar counter). Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (open) time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d -B.

  Next, the special game control means MP30 is a condition determining means MP31 for determining whether or not a condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and a content of the special game when the special game shift condition is satisfied. (Specifically, a special winning content, an open state, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined, and the special game content determining means MP32 set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special winning opening C10. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the game under a predetermined condition, and a special game for performing time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, opening and closing time of the special winning opening C10). And time management means MP34. Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes a special winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C that opens and closes the special winning opening electric auditorium C11d, and a winning ball counter MP33c that measures a winning ball to the special winning opening C10. Have. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta which is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table Although not shown in detail, this is a table in which the special winning opening to be opened, the maximum number of rounds, the content of execution of the first round, and the like are defined.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the end condition of the probability-variable game state is satisfied, and determines whether or not the end condition of the time-reduced game state is satisfied. And a game state relating to the fluctuation of the main game symbol (a so-called limited frequency, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed). Means a state in which the type and / or the selectivity of the variation type of the main game symbol are different). Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time savings. Here, the probability variation gaming state means a gaming state in which the winning probability at the time of winning / losing the first main game symbol and the second main gaming symbol is higher than the non-probability varying gaming state, and the time shortening gaming state Means that the average value of the fluctuating time of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is shorter than the non-time shortened game state, and / or the second main game start port electric accessory per unit time It means a gaming state in which the ease of opening B11d is improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuating time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively reduced during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game (time reduction). function). Further, the auxiliary game symbol becomes a winning symbol with a high probability, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended ( Opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of times of change of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times. That is, the number of time savings is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol change (stop). In addition, the above-described probable change game termination condition determination means MP51 and the time saving game termination condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time shortening game) to a normal game at a predetermined probability every time a symbol is changed. (In the case of a pachinko game machine having a so-called falling lottery function).

  The limited frequency control means MP53 has a limited frequency counter MP53c for measuring the duration of the limited frequency.

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB stores the first main game (the game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game), and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state (for example, the number of rounds, the winning number of game balls in an arbitrary round, the ON / OFF of various flags related to the special game, etc.) in the special game. Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20b and the current game state of the specific game (for example, the number of remaining hours, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is configured to stop the first or second main game symbol currently changing (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied). It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and fluctuation mode information.

  The auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol relating to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

  Next, the gaming peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some of the peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices include a first main game peripheral device A which is a first main game side peripheral device, a second main game peripheral device B which is a second main game side peripheral device, and a first main game side device. And first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral devices H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG). Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM includes the variation of the decoration symbols in a form synchronized with the variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of displaying stop and change of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game start port B10 serving as an opportunity for a transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping and changing the second main game symbol. And

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C have a special winning opening C10 which is in a closed state during a normal game and opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). doing.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Next, effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub-control unit SS. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing design information and display instruction information relating to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 for determining a decoration pattern change mode and a stop symbol and performing a display control processing, and a decoration holding control for managing the number of reserved decorative symbols and the hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 which controls background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 which controls preview effect content determination processing and display control processing, and reach effect content And a reach effect display control means SM25 for performing the determination processing and the display control processing.

  Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, and determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol SM21n, and relates to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol. A schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and a schematic variable time management timer SM21t for measuring the variation time of the decorative symbol. ,have. Here, the design display content determining means SM21n further has a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta which is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). Is not shown).

  Next, the design suspension information display control means SM22 temporarily stores information relating to the suspension relating to the decorative symbol (the same as the information transmitted from the main control board M side, but details of the information will be described later). For storing temporary storage information SM22b.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23, based on the information from the main control board M side, the background effect (displayed on the back of the decorative design in this example, based on the information on the hold, the possibility of executing the special game There is a background effect display content determining means SM23n for deciding the display contents of the effect), and a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for temporarily storing information related to the background effect display.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24, based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect (displayed during the display of the change of the decorative pattern in this example, the degree of expectation to shift to the special game in the change And an announcement effect display content deciding means SM24n for deciding display contents and display timing of the effect of suggesting and informing the feasibility of the special game based on the information relating to the hold, and for temporarily storing information relating to the announcement effect display. And a notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25, based on the information from the main control board M side, the reach effect (mainly displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbols, the reach state by the combination of the stop-displayed decorative symbols) This is an effect that is performed after it is notified that the display has become, but also includes an effect that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the decorative pattern even if the reach state is not reached.) It has a reach effect display content determining means SM25n to be determined and a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing information related to the reach effect display.

  Further, effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS includes sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with sub-main control unit SM, and image display for displaying an image in display area SG10 on effect display device SG. And control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG for displaying an image relating to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying decorative symbols, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  Note that the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub-control unit) SS controls the sub-game control. Means (sub-main control unit) is controlled by the SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M. First, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing of FIG. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, initialization is performed (not shown, initialization of registers, setting of input / output ports, etc. is performed), and in step 1002, the main control board M Is confirmed, and whether the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E is operated, that is, whether the operation of clearing the contents of the RAM is intentionally performed by the administrator of the game arcade or the like is performed. Is determined. If Yes in step 1002, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side in step 1004. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (even if transmitted at the timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are abnormal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM accurately) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (the above-described RAM clearing process). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing, and a control command described later will be described. Transmission may be performed by transmission processing), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a periodic interruption (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T). As a result, when the execution-timed interrupt timing has been reached, FIG. 14B is executed. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, increment processing of a random number counter) until the next regular interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 2B based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interruption period T arrives (for example, a hardware interruption every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a later-described electric accessory driving determination process. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning port where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH executes the process and manages the result thereof. (For example, in this example, three prize balls per one ball entering the first main game start port A10, (2) One prize ball per one ball entering the main game starting port B10, 13 prize balls per one ball entering the large winning port C10, and 10 per one ball entering the general winning port. Prize balls will be paid out). Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, and the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above-described processes to the sub-main control unit side), which is executed immediately before execution of the interrupt process. The process returns to the previous process.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, at the time of the NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game starting port entrance ball judging means MJ11-H judges whether a game ball has entered the auxiliary game starting port H10 (flowed in, or passed in the case of a gate). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and determines whether the number of reserved balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 1104, in Step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information of the number of the holding in the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32b-H. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage unit MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H, and the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol is It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to change the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). At the same time, by referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag Is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off, and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of an auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are “D0, D1, D2”, and the stop symbols that become the hit symbols are “D1, D2”. In the non-time-saving game (when the auxiliary game flag is off), the opening mode of the electric accessory, which is opened due to the stop of the hit symbol, is (opening → closing for 0.2 seconds) in the non-time shortening game. In the time reduction game (when the auxiliary game flag is on), the opening mode is (open for 1 second → closed). Further, during the time-reduction game (when the auxiliary game flag is turned on), the stop symbol is configured to easily become the hit symbol "D1 or D2".

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-H sends the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H to the auxiliary game symbol based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding unit MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol with reference to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and acquires the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is definitely displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "hit symbol" (D1 in this example). I do. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the opening mode (for example, in the case of a time reduction game, opens for one second) based on the game state. Then, a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, and proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B and outputs the second main game start port electric accessory It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, one second) related to the opening time of the accessory B11d has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily sets the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage unit MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If the answer is No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242; if the answer is No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224; Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1300).

  In the present flowchart, for convenience, the process immediately proceeds to the next step after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but is not limited thereto. In such a case, the process may be shifted to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by performing a branch process using a fixed stop display flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting port entrance determining means MJ11-A sends the first main game starting port entry information from the first main game starting port entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting port A10. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the reserved ball relating to the first main game is It is determined whether it is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a win / fail lottery random number for determining win / fail, a symbol random number for determining a winning symbol, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the fluctuation random number random numbers for obtaining the random numbers are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, respectively, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 sets information (hold generation command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1302 or 1304, the processing shifts to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start port entrance judging means MJ11-B sends the second main game start port entrance ball from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the reserved ball relating to the second main game is It is determined whether it is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B obtains the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, a winning / rejecting random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the fluctuation random number random numbers for obtaining the random numbers are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, respectively, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sets information (hold generation command) indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Note that also in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  In the present embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320. The information may be transmitted together with the number of reservations, and the information may be used as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the holding digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and checks whether or not the second main game symbol holding is present. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and returns to the caller of this subroutine. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reservation of the first main game symbol) Is configured to be executed with priority given to holding the second main game symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery in which the lottery is randomly performed.)

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve digestion control means MJ31 determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), the main game symbol is not being changed, the main game symbol is on hold, and the small hit game is not being performed. Condition. Although not shown in the present example, when a fixed variation time (time for stopping and displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is confirmed) is provided, the variation start condition of the next variation is provided during the fixed variation time. May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digestion control unit MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol change is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the temporarily stored remaining information is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, Based on one main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning random determination random number), a main game symbol success / failure lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, a small-hit can be won, which is a trigger for executing a game for opening a special winning opening for only one round (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a small-hit game). The second main game is also configured to be easier to win the small hit (the small hit probability does not differ between the non-probability changing game state and the probability changing game state). Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the small hits are provided on both the first main game side and the second main game side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hits may be provided only on the second main game side. .

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) sets the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol success / failure lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. When a small hit is won, a small hit game of 1R is always executed. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are also examples only, and are not limited thereto.For example, the lost symbol and the small hit symbol are not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be used. When a specific symbol (for example, a specific small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the variation mode of the main game symbol and And / or a transition to a state with a different selectivity (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a limited frequency state).

  In addition, a special game execution round may be provided in which the special winning opening is opened only for a very short time (for example, 52 ms). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to acquire a payout in the opening in a very short time, and therefore, on the effect display device SG, “From the actual number of rounds of the special game, The number of rounds in which the opening in a very short time is subtracted is subtracted from the number of rounds ". Displaying images of balls for the number of easy rounds, and producing an effect in which the display mode of the image of the balls changes (or disappears) each time the round easy to acquire a ball starts (or ends). It may be configured to execute. The present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds already executed during the special game and in which a payout can be easily obtained may be displayed on the effect display device SG. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize how many rounds in which a payout can be substantially obtained have been executed. In addition, during the special game, the notification of the round in which it is easy to obtain the expected payout and the notification of the round in which the executed payout is easy to obtain are not required to be performed in all special games. It may be configured to be executed only during the special game at the time of (the big hit won in the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state), or the special game related to the first main game side and the second main game side. The execution or non-execution may be made different from the special game.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game change mode determining means MN51-A (the second main game change mode determining means MN51-B) sets the second game state corresponding to each game state and the set limited frequency type. With reference to the 1 main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol win / fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (2nd main game) The change mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the content determination random number) (in particular, the change mode random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and step 1412 is executed. Move to

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of the main game symbol win / fail lottery, the main game time reduction flag state, and the set limited frequency type. It is configured to be. That is, when the result of the lottery of the main game symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time becomes relatively long is likely to be determined, and when the main game time reduction flag is ON (time reduction game state), It is configured such that the variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. In addition, as shown in the variation mode at the time of losing and at the time of a small hit, when the second limited frequency is set (for example, after the end of the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B”), the 0th limited frequency, It is configured such that the variation mode in a relatively short time is selected as compared with the case where the first limited frequency is set (for example, after the end of the special game relating to the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol “7B”). In particular, in the case of a small hit, the difference in the variation time between the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency is large, and the difference is large between the second limited frequency and the first limited frequency in the case of loss. It is relatively larger than the difference in the fluctuation time (average value) from the frequency. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of stop symbol, the selectivity, and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, different tables are not configured according to the number of reserved balls, but it is needless to say that different tables may be configured according to the number of reserved balls. Absent. Further, the symbol change time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long. {Symbol on the second main game side} When the execution of the change is configured to be advantageous to the player, the symbol change efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, so that the second main game side is likely to be suspended (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated. In addition, the variation mode related to the small hit on the first main game side is configured to be only one type, but is not limited thereto, and a plurality of types of variation modes may be provided (especially, a game state or a set state). It is preferable to configure such that a different variation mode can be selected based on the limited frequency type that is set.)

  Next, in step 1412, the game content determining means MN executes a command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. (Variation mode information, etc.) and a command relating to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (control command transmission processing in step 1999). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1414, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Then, the timer is started. Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the fluctuation display of the main game symbol is started in accordance with the fluctuation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Move to step 1422.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1420, the process proceeds to step 1422, and if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1422, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol of the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the display unit A21g (the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is determined. Display control is performed as a stop symbol. Next, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C transmits information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol change is finished to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C to determine whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1430, at step 1434, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1434, the game content determining means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1436, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1434, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later. Next, in step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a limited frequency end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1422, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time-saving counter MP52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1508, in steps 1510 and 1512, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1550). Note that also in the case of No in step 1502, 1504, or 1508, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the limited frequency control means MP53 is a limited frequency counter MP53c (a counter that manages the number of fluctuations during the limited frequency, and a value is set in step 1760, step 1764, or step 1770 in FIG. 16). , It is determined whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the limited frequency control means MP53 decrements the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1556, the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining limited frequency number) is 0.

  If Yes in step 1556, in step 1558, the limited frequency control unit MP53 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b, and determines whether the currently set limited frequency type is the second limited frequency. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1558, in step 1560, the limited frequency control unit MP53 sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporary storage in the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b). Next, in step 1562, the limited frequency control unit MP53 sets the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c to a first specific number (for example, 65535 times, but to continue the first limited frequency until the next big hit). , May be an extremely large value or ∞ times, etc.), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). As described above, when a predetermined number of changes (described later, for example, 70 times) has elapsed in the second limited frequency state, the state shifts to the first limited frequency state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1558, that is, in the 0th limited frequency state (excluding the first limited frequency state because it is not realistic, the first limited frequency state is not realistic), the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 In this case, the limited frequency control unit MP53 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b in step 1564, and the set limit is set. The frequency type is cleared (at the same time, the time-reduced game state is also ended), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1552 or step 1556, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determining means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30 sets the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game time reduction flag / auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, in step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1608, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1610, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in steps 1704 and 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1702, in Step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if “Yes” in the step 1710, the process shifts to a step 1712. In the case of No at step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 stores the opening pattern of the special winning opening C10 in the round in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. (For example, an open pattern that continues to be opened and a pattern that opens and closes) are set. Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 drives the special winning opening electric accessory C11d to open the special winning opening C10 (hereinafter, based on the opening pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Opening / closing is performed), a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an open time timer) is set for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and started, and the flow proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening C10 is being opened, the flow shifts to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, and the like) relating to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls has been present in the special winning opening C10 in the round. . In the case of Yes at step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1724, at Step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) and sets a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. If the determination in Step 1726 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 stops driving the special winning opening electric accessory C11d and closes the special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b.

  Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the last round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). (Not shown) (whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) for ending the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). It should be noted that also in the case of No at step 1734, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines that the current stop symbol is a probable variable big hit symbol (for example, 5A / 5B / 7A / 7B). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes at Step 1752, at Step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b.

  Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether the current stop symbol is a specific big hit symbol (for example, 7B). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporary storage in the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b). Next, in step 1760, the specific game control means MP50 sets a second specific number (for example, 70) as the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c, and proceeds to step 1772. In this example, the second main game side is configured to shift to the second limited frequency state (described later, a state advantageous to the player) only at the end of the special game relating to the big hit on the second main game side. It is not limited to. However, by configuring the second main game side to be more easily shifted to a state advantageous to the player than the first main game side, the player in the probability fluctuation game state and / or the time reduction game state can be provided to the player. Advantageous states and effects overlap, making it possible to increase the excitement of the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporary storage in the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b). Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c to the first specific number (for example, 65535 times, but the first limited frequency is continued until the next big hit). , May be an extremely large value or Δ times, etc.), and the flow shifts to step 1772.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1752, that is, if it is the end of the special game relating to the non-probable variable hit, in step 1766, the specific game control means MP50 sets the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). ) Is set. Next, at step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the 0th limited frequency as the limited frequency type (temporarily stores the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b). Next, in step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the 0th specific number (for example, 50 times which is the same value as the number of time savings) as the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c, and proceeds to step 1772. That is, the first limited frequency or the second limited frequency is set when shifting to the probability varying gaming state, and the 0th limited frequency is set when not shifting to the probability varying gaming state.

  Next, in step 1772 and step 1774, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and executes the next processing (step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1802, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hitting flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in steps 1804 and 1806, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns off the small hitting flag and turns on the small hitting execution flag in the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB. To Next, in step 1808, the small hitting game control means MP40 sets the opening time (for example, 1.7 seconds) of the special winning opening C10 in the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1810, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the big winning port C10 and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 sets a small hit start command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has been started, and proceeds to step 1816. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1802, at Step 1814, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hitting execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1814, the process moves to step 1816.

  Next, in step 1816, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the ball has been entered in the special winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1820. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1816, in step 1818, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game timer MP41t, and a predetermined time (1.7 seconds in this example) related to opening the big winning opening. Is determined. If Yes in step 1818, the process moves to step 1820.

  Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 sets a small hit end command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hit game has ended. Next, in step 1822, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops driving the special winning opening electric accessory C11d and closes the special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1824, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1826, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns off the small hitting execution flag in the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1814 or step 1818, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 23, control processing executed on the sub main control unit SM side will be described. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process in FIG. 7A is a process on the sub main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or the like. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When receiving → initialize the sub-side RAM, when receiving various information commands → reset the performance-related information at the time of power interruption in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a small hit game related display process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and executes The repetition processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2600) is loop-processed after reset. The process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM sends a command input port ( Check the above-mentioned data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b) based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process executed immediately before the interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the suspension information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the layout pending information display control means SM22 receives a new suspension occurrence command (suspended information relating to the main game symbol) from the main control board M with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 adds "1" to the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four) in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. I do. Next, in step 2106, the circuit diagram reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, stores the reservation information (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery or the main control The main game symbol success / failure lottery result determined in advance on the basis of the random number value on the substrate M side) is temporarily stored in the circuit diagram holding information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2110, the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the schematic storage counter in the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the design suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the suspension information relating to the symbol change from the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining suspension information. Next, in step 2116, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM accesses the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2118. .

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 makes full use of the rendering display means SS to display the layout on the rendering display device SG (particularly, the first and second suspension display sections SG12 and SG13). The same number of the suspension display lamps as the circuit diagram suspension counter value in the diagram suspension information temporary storage means SM22b are lit on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). If the determination in step 2110 is No, the process moves to step 2118.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the schematic display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the schematic display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) transmit the symbol information temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. With reference to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the variation of the decoration, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is the big hit symbol In the case of a zigzag pattern such as "7 / 7.7" or a losing pattern, a variation pattern "1 / 3.5" or the like and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode of the main game In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, and in the case of long-time fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc. are determined, and the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2202, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is ON with reference to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the decoration variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes at step 2310, at step 2311, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 checks the timer value of the schematic variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the decorative symbol based on the timer value of the decoration variable time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , To step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2312, at step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs decoration based on the decoration variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). , And the process proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2316, in step 2320, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) transmits the design variation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and the reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command relating to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and proceeds to step 2330. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2320, the process shifts to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and from the main control board M side to the main game symbol). Information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed = determines whether or not a symbol confirmation display instruction command has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (fixed display command) of the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (clears to zero) the decoration variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). I do. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2330, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and displays the effect display device. A jackpot start display is performed on the SG (display is performed appropriately based on the type of the jackpot = that is, if the player does not want to be aware of the occurrence of a jackpot that opens and closes only the short winning opening for a short period of time, the jackpot start display Is not performed), and the routine goes to Step 2412. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability and big hits). It may be appropriately executed as needed based on the type or the like). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of the big hit). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2414, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the small hit game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the small hit flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game related to the second limited frequency is being played (the limited frequency type is the second limited frequency type). It is determined whether or not the limited frequency is set. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to a special small hit start display (a short-time effect compared to a normal small hit display described later) (display in step 2999). The command is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the command transmission control process), and the flow shifts to step 2512. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2506, in step 2510, the background effect display control means SM23 relates to the normal small hit start display (medium time effect, and the effect time is longer than the special small hit start display). The command is set, and the flow shifts to step 2512. In the present embodiment, the special small hit start display and the normal small hit start display are configured to be executed during the execution of the small hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the symbol stop display, a waiting time from when the special winning opening C10 is opened or after the completion of the opening of the special winning opening C10 until a new symbol change is started) is provided. A special small hit start display and a normal small hit start display may be executed. In such a case, the time value is different between the small hit demonstration time of the small hit where the special small hit start display is executed and the small hit demonstration time of the small hit where the normal small hit start display is executed. It is desirable. Furthermore, the time value of the small hit demonstration time is different between the case where the small hit occurs in the situation where the time reduction game state is set and the case where the small hit occurs in the situation where the time reduction game state is not set. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain a payout by a small hit, but it is not possible to obtain a payout by a small hit, which indicates a transition of a game state. In some applications, a small hit may be provided (for example, a small hit is provided on the first main game side). In this case, when a small hit occurs in a situation other than the time shortened game state, the small hit demonstration time becomes relatively long, and the effect is performed using the period, while the time reduced game state is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs in a situation and the necessity to execute the effect is low, the small hit demonstration time is set to a relatively short time so as not to hinder smooth game progress. Can be mentioned.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2514. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2514. Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2514, in step 2516 the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to small hit end display (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). . Next, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2999). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2514, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  Next, FIG. 24 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the present embodiment. In this example, for convenience of explanation, an example is described in which small hits occur regularly at an average change interval (once about every 11 changes, a small hit occurs). The firing interval of the game ball according to the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds per ball (100 balls per minute), and during the opening of the special winning opening C10 related to the small hit game for 1.7 seconds, Three game balls are to enter the special winning opening C10.

  First, as shown in the section of FIG. 7A, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, the difference between the number of game balls fired and the prize ball by entering the first main game start port A10. As a result, the ball possessed by the player gradually decreases.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3B, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A”, a prize ball is paid out by entering the big winning opening C10, thereby holding the player. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A” is completed, the game enters the probability variation / time reduction game state, and the first limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 7C, in the probability fluctuation / time reduction game state (first limited frequency), a small hit has a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 fluctuations). As a result, the prize balls are paid out by entering the special winning opening C10 relating to the small hit, and the ball possessed by the player increases (slowly increases as compared with the special game described above). Here, in the section (c), the symbol change is performed 33 times in about 65 seconds (about 117 small balls are won by three small hits).

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 4D, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B”, the prize ball is paid out by entering the big winning opening C10, so that the player's possession is achieved. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B” is completed, the game enters the probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the same figure, in the probability fluctuation / time reduction game state (first limited frequency), a small hit has a probability of 97/1024 (= about once every 11 fluctuations). As a result, the prize ball is paid out by entering the special winning opening C10 relating to the small hit, and the ball possessed by the player increases (slowly increases as compared with the special game described above). Here, in the section (e), the symbol change is executed 33 times in about 23 seconds (about 117 small prize balls are obtained by three small hits). That is, as compared with the first limited frequency, the number of winning prize balls obtained by small hits (or the expected value thereof) during the same number of changes is the same, but the time for digesting the symbol change of the same number of changes is shorter. Because it is short, it can appear as if it is a state of high profit for the player. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, about 108 game balls are fired in 65 seconds, and about 38 game balls are fired in 23 seconds. Therefore, the lower the ball entry rate into the second main game starting port B10, the more game balls fired during the time to exhaust the same number of fluctuations are lost, so that the second limited frequency is longer than the first limited frequency. It should be added that the profit is actually higher for the player.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a timing chart according to the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment. First, in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, at the timing 1 in the figure, the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “5A”, and the 8R special game is executed. .

  Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A” is finished, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are set, and the first limited frequency is set. Note that during the time-reduced game state, the change of the second main game symbol is basically executed.

  Next, at timing 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol "BK" (at the time of the small hit game, the probability variation occurs). The game state and the time-saving game state are not switched).

  Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, the 16R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "7B". At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to a non-probable change (non-probability changing game state) and the fluctuation time is changed to a non-time reduction (non-time shortened game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “7B” is finished, the game shifts to the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state, and the second limited frequency is set. You. Here, the state in which the second limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as the second limited frequency state) continues for a maximum of 70 fluctuations, and the fluctuation time of the main game symbol (the fluctuation time in loss and small hit) ) Is a state in which the time is likely to be shorter in comparison with a state in which the first limited frequency is set (sometimes referred to as a first limited frequency state). In this example, it is assumed that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 70 times (no special game is executed) within the period of 5 to 6 in the figure.

  Next, at timing 6 in the figure, the second limited frequency state ends and the mode shifts to the first limited frequency state, triggered by the main game symbol being stopped and displayed 70 times in the second limited frequency state.

  Next, at the timing 7 in the figure, the 8R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “4B”. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to a non-probable change (non-probability changing game state) and the fluctuation time is changed to a non-time reduction (non-time shortened game state).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “4B” is completed, the game mode shifts to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state, and the 0th limited frequency is set. (Hereinafter, in the present example, the time reduction game state and the 0th limited frequency state will be continued for a maximum of 50 fluctuations).

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, after the end of the special game relating to the specific big hit symbol (in this example, “7B”), the main gaming symbol is displayed for a predetermined period. The state shifts to a state in which the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation and the small hit fluctuation in this example) is likely to be short (for example, the second limited frequency state). As a result, since the fluctuation efficiency of the second main game side is increased, the occurrence interval of the small hit (and the small hit game) can be shortened, and even during the same probability fluctuation / time shortening game state, the player , A new state of play (or a state that appears to be advantageous to the player) can be created.

  In the present embodiment, the state in which the second limited frequency is set is configured to end with 70 fluctuations, but is not limited to this, and is configured to be continued until the next big hit is won. Is also good.

  Although not particularly shown in this example, the effect mode (the type of effect system such as a background effect or a notice effect) may be changed depending on the limited frequency type set. As such a configuration, for example, when the second limited frequency is set (after the end of the special game that shifts to the second limited frequency), the effect mode is effect mode A (for example, a night background image is displayed). ), And when the first limited frequency or the zero limited frequency is set (after the end of the special game in which the transition to the first limited frequency or the zero limited frequency is completed), the production mode is the production mode B (for example, in the evening) (A background image is displayed). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, at a part of a symbol change scheduled to be a big hit when staying in the effect mode A, an effect such as shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B during the symbol change (the background image at night) To change to the background image in the evening). Further, in such a configuration, at the time of a symbol change scheduled to be a big hit during the stay in the effect mode A, and when it is planned to shift to the second limited frequency again after the end of the special game related to the big hit, You may comprise so that the possibility of maintaining the stay of the effect mode A may become high. In other words, when an effect such as shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is performed, the configuration is changed to the first limited frequency or the 0th limited frequency after the end of the special game relating to the symbol change. Since the possibility of transition is increased, which may be disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game depending on whether or not such an effect is performed. In other words, when such a transition to the production mode is not performed for the transition from the production mode B to the production mode A, when the production mode B is staying (* without the mode transition, from the beginning (after the end of the latest special game) From) When staying in the production mode B, the big hit occurs in the case of ① and the big hit occurs in the production mode B with the mode transition. In this configuration, the effect of shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B is suggested as the effect of shifting from the effect mode A to the effect mode B. Such an effect may be performed, and then a specific reach effect may be executed. Alternatively, an effect similar to the specific reach effect may be generated during the stay in the effect mode B.

  Although not particularly shown in this example, even if any of the limited frequency types is set, the total number of game balls entering the large winning opening C10 at the time of the small hit game is displayed or entered. The count display may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, the total number of winning prize balls (small hits, small hits, etc.) during the period in which the second limited frequency is set (in particular, during the period in which the second limited frequency → special game → second limited frequency →... Is looped) (Sum of the number of prize balls such as big hits, etc.) may be displayed on the effect display device SG. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the total acquired prize balls displayed on the effect display device SG when the second limited frequency state ends (* or when the effect mode A is shifted to the effect mode B). The number is temporarily stored, and at the timing when the production mode in the next second limited frequency state shifts from the production mode A to the production mode B, the total acquired prize balls displayed at the timing and the temporary storage. The sum of the total acquired prize balls may be displayed on the effect display device SG. Further, while the number of acquired prize balls due to small hits is added to the total acquired prize balls displayed on the effect display device SG in the second limited frequency state, the 0th limited frequency state and the first In the limited frequency state, it is desirable that the number of acquired prize balls due to small hits is not displayed (in order to make it appear that the payout speed is improved by the number of acquired prize balls due to small hits in the second limited frequency state). Of differentiating).

  Although not particularly shown in the present example, a game state to be shifted to after the end of the special game relating to the same big hit symbol depending on the game state at the time of the big hit which triggered the special game (in particular, the time-saving game state / limited frequency) State) and the duration thereof may be different. For example, in this example, after the end of the time shortening game, if the remaining second main game side holds the big hit related to the “7B” symbol, the second limited frequency is set after the end of the special game related to the big hit. It may be configured not to set (for example, to set the first limited frequency).

  Further, in the present example, the opportunity to shift to the state advantageous to the player (in this example, the second limited frequency state) is set only at the end of the special game relating to one type of big hit symbol, but is not limited thereto. Instead, for example, a plurality of big hit symbols that shift to a state advantageous to the player after the end of the special game may be provided. Also, in this case, the period during which the player is in an advantageous state is different depending on which of the big hit symbols the big hit is made (for example, for 70 fluctuations after the big hit A, for 150 fluctuations after the big hit B, (Advantageous state). In addition, when a plurality of small hit symbols or loss symbols are provided and a specific small hit symbol or loss symbol is won, a transition can be made to a state advantageous to the player (meaning the second limited frequency in the present embodiment). You may comprise. In this case, as described above, the game state to be shifted to after the small hit game related to the same small hit symbol and the duration thereof may be different depending on the game state at the time of the small hit.

(2nd Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, a prize ball is acquired mainly by entering the special winning opening C10 during the special game relating to the big hit. Element. Therefore, a configuration in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained by small hits is referred to as a second embodiment. Hereinafter, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 26 is a front view of a gaming machine according to the second embodiment. As a difference from the present embodiment, there are two starting ports for the first main game. In this example, the first main game starting port (1) A10-1 and the first main game starting port (2) A10-2. The first main game starting port (2) A10-2, which is one of the first main game starting ports, is easy to enter the first main game starting port (2) A10-2. A first main game starting port A11-2d capable of being displaced between an open state and a closed state where entering a ball is difficult (displaceable based on the result of the auxiliary game), and a first main game starting port (2 ) A first main game start-up ball detection device (2) A11-2s for detecting a ball into A10-2. The second main game start port B10 is constantly displaced (for example, irregularly displaced) between an open state where it is easy to enter the second main game start port B10 and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball. The entry of game balls is restricted by the 2 main game start opening ball entry control member B11f. Note that the opening / closing control of the first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d is substantially the same as the opening / closing control of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the present embodiment, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  First, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1403 (second), the purpose of which is to configure so that the first main game side can be put on hold in preference to the second main game side. . That is, in step 1403 (second), the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and checks whether or not the hold of the first main game symbol exists. I do. If Yes in step 1403 (second), the process proceeds to step 1400 (1), and if No, the process proceeds to step 1400 (2).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a table configuration diagram of a main game symbol lottery according to the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are the small hit probability, the big hit symbol, and the variation mode (variation time) at the time of the small hit in the second main game. First, the small hit probability in the second main game is 1004/1024, and the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side is configured to be a small hit with a high probability.

  Next, the big hit symbol is to be selected from 5A / 7A on the first main game side and 5B on the second main game side. Is configured to shift to a probability-variable gaming state with a limited number of times (so-called ST). In the special game related to 5A and 5B, a 2R jackpot (not shown, but it is difficult to enter a game ball because the large winning opening C10 is opened short), and in the special game related to 7A, an 8R jackpot ( Although not particularly shown, the game winning ball C10 is easily opened for long opening of the special winning opening C10).

  Further, in the present example, it is configured to be able to shift to the time reduction game state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on) only after the end of the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7A”. ing. That is, depending on the big hit on the second main game side, it is not possible to shift to the time reduction game state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), but this example is merely an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, it is possible to shift to a time reduction game state (in this example, particularly, a state where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on). It may be configured as follows. However, even in such a case, the second main game side is configured to be less likely to shift to the time reduction game than the first main game side. Between the game that wins the game and the game that wins the prize ball by the small hit on the second main game side.

  Further, the variation time on the second main game side is configured to be determined based on the limited frequency type that is set, without depending on the main game time reduction flag. For example, when there is no limited frequency (and in the non-probability-variable game state), if a small hit occurs on the second main game side, Bkx (75 seconds), Bky (85 seconds), and Bkz (95 seconds) , The variation mode is determined. In this case, since the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation time is determined randomly from among the three patterns, when there is no limited frequency (in the non-probability fluctuation game state), the player is small. Even if an attempt is made to obtain a prize ball by hitting, the efficiency is low, and the game on the first main game side is executed. On the other hand, at the time of the second limited frequency (especially, in the probability fluctuation game state), if the second main game side has a small hit, the fluctuation mode of Bk2 (1 second) is uniformly selected (and the second fluctuation mode). The main game side wins the small hit with a high probability). With such a table configuration, at the second limited frequency, the player can execute the game on the second main game side and efficiently acquire the prize ball by the small hitting game. In the loss fluctuation, when there is no limited frequency (and in the non-probability variable gaming state), a fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively longer than in the second limited frequency (particularly in the probability variable gaming state) is selected. It is configured to:

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1522, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the count value is greater than 0 with reference to the probability change counter MP51c. If Yes in step 1522, in step 1524, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the probability change counter MP51c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1526, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the counter value is 0 with reference to the probability change counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1530, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1531, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). Note that also in the case of No in step 1522 or step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. The only difference from this embodiment is that the processing of steps 1558 to 1562 in FIG. 13 is not executed, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 1605 (second), and the purpose is to clear the value of the newly provided probability change counter MP51c. That is, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second), the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the probability change counter MP51c.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 15 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is that step 1753 (second), step 1775 (second), step 1763 (second), step 1765 (second), step 1775 (second), and step 1777 (second). The purpose is to execute processing according to the structure of the big hit symbol of the second embodiment and to determine the limited frequency set after the end of the special game. That is, in step 1753 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) in the probability change counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1754. Also, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1754, in step 1775 (second), the specific game control means MP50 determines that the stop symbol is a specific big hit symbol (a big hit that shifts to a time shortening game state after the end of the special game). In this example, it is determined whether or not the pattern is 7A). In the case of Yes in step 1775 (second), the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag are turned on in steps 1772 and 1774, and in step 1775 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the specific game related The limited frequency type set (temporarily stored) in the information temporary storage unit MB30b is cleared. Next, in step 1777 (second), the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c.

  On the other hand, in the case of No, in step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type (by setting the second limited frequency, the second main game is set). The fluctuation time of the pattern becomes extremely short). Next, in step 1765 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MP53c to a predetermined number (in this example, it is 200, and it is desirable to set the same value as the probability change number counter MP51c). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, first, the first main game side plays a game, and a big hit occurs. In the case of transition to the shortened game state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on), the opening efficiency of the first main game starter electric accessory A11-2d increases the fluctuation efficiency. The game on the first main game side which is in an advantageous state for the player (the game in which the first main game side acquires a prize ball by a special game related to a big hit) is mainly executed. On the other hand, if the transition to the probability-variable gaming state with a limited number of times and the non-time shortening gaming state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary gaming time reduction flag is off) is set after the special game is over, the second limited frequency Is set and the fluctuation efficiency is increased, so that the player is in an advantageous state by the second main game side (a game in which the second main game side obtains a prize ball by a small hit game related to a small hit). Is mainly executed. As described above, two types of games having different game characteristics (particularly, a method of acquiring a prize ball) depending on the game state to be shifted after the end of the special game (not shown in this example, but different effects are respectively performed). (May be configured), it is possible to create a novel gaming machine. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, regardless of which of the above-described game states the game state has been shifted, after the end of the special game, a right strike (launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). ), It is possible to execute a game that is advantageous to the player, and it is also possible to easily understand the game method.

  Although not particularly shown in this example, after the end of the special game, the probability-variable game state with a limited number of times (so-called ST) and the time reduction game state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on) In the case of shifting to (), the first main gaming side enjoys whether or not a symbol change within the number limit will result in a big hit, as in a general ST-type gaming machine. , ST may be definitely reported. On the other hand, if the transition to the probability-variable game state with a limited number of times and the non-time shortened game state (in this example, particularly, the state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is made after the end of the special game, the second main game Side, the profitability is obtained by the small hit game that occurs almost every time, so the big hit on the second main game side has a strong meaning of resetting the remaining ST times (the big winning opening is 2R short open) It is difficult to obtain a prize ball). That is, since it is not possible to know how long the high profit state will be maintained by resetting the remaining ST times, it is the gaming property on the second main game side, so that the remaining ST times are reported indefinitely (or not reported). It is preferred to configure. In addition to the display of the remaining ST times, when executing two types of games having different game characteristics, different effects may be respectively executed. For example, when performing a game in the probability fluctuation / time shortening game state (mainly, a game on the first main game side), it is preferable to execute an effect to inspire whether or not a big hit will occur within the number of STs. It is. On the other hand, when performing a game in the probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state (mainly, a game on the second main game side), how small a hit is during the 200 fluctuations in the limited frequency state. It is preferable to execute an effect that inspires the user.

(Modification Example 1 from Second Embodiment)
Here, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a gaming machine having a gaming property in which both a prize ball can be obtained by a special game and a prize ball can be obtained by a small hit game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration specializing in obtaining prize balls by hitting. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 33 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first modification example of the second embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are the position and shape of the second main game start port B10. In the first modification example from the second embodiment, the second main game start port B10 is provided directly below the first main game start port A10, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is the first main game start port B10. The game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are configured to be able to enter the ball. In addition, the second main game start port B10 has a horizontally long shape, so that a game ball can always enter, and the game ball can easily enter compared with the first main game start port A10 (in this example, The game ball is easily entered because the opening portion into which the game ball enters is large (the number of award balls pertaining to entry into the second main game start port B10 is one).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to a subroutine of step 1400 (second variation 1) in FIG. 5 in a first modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the second main game side can start even when the fluctuation of the first main game side occurs, and the fluctuation of the first main game side also occurs when the fluctuation of the second main game side occurs. Can be started (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 35 shows a first (second) main game symbol display process according to a subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 34 in a first modification example of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1404 (second variation 1) and steps 1438 (second variation 1) to 1454 (second variation 1), the purpose of which is to be able to execute a parallel lottery. It is to be. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. That is, in step 1404 (second variation 1), the reserve digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the variation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during a special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during the change of the first main game symbol (in the case of the processing of the second main game symbol, the second main game symbol is used). (It is not fluctuating), and there is a condition that a main game symbol is on hold and that a small hit game is not being performed.

  After setting the information on the determined main game symbol and the command related to the game state information in step 1412, in step 1438 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C: A predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is set in the first main game timer MP11t-C1 (second main game timer MP11t-C2), and the timer is started. Next, in step 1440 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) to the first main game symbol display device A20. On the game symbol display section A21g (second main game symbol display section B21g), the first main game symbol (second main game symbol information) is stored in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Start the variable display of game symbols). Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C in the flag area. The 1 (second) variation flag is turned on, and the flow shifts to step 1444 (second variation 1).

  Next, in step 1444 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has reached a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in Step 1444 (Second Modification 1), in Step 1446 (Second Modification 1), the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C uses the first main game symbol display device A20 (Second Modification 1). The variable display of the main game symbols on the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g) of the game symbol display device B20) is stopped, and first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means. The stop symbols stored in the MB 11b-C are displayed and controlled as the fixed stop symbols. The process moves to step 1452 (second variation 1). On the other hand, if No in step 1444 (second variation 1), in step 1448 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Then, it is determined whether the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in Step 1448 (Second Modification 1), in Step 1450 (Second Modification 1), the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C uses the first main game symbol display device A20 (Second Modification 1). The change display of the main game symbol on the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g) of the game symbol display device B20) is stopped with the stop symbol being a lost symbol, and the lost symbol is stopped. The display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the flow shifts to step 1452 (second variation 1).

  Next, in step 1452 (second variation 1), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) indicating that symbol variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM. This is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-side control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1999). Next, in step 1454 (second variation 1), the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C in the flag area. The 1 (second) changing flag is turned off, and the flow shifts to step 1430. If No in step 1448 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 36 is an image diagram illustrating a transition of the number of game balls in a first modification example from the second embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the same figure, in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, the number of game balls fired and the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are Due to the difference from the prize ball due to entering, the ball possessed by the player gradually decreases.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3B, in the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A”, the special winning opening C10 is shortly opened (a short time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls possessed by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A” is completed, the game enters the probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) of the same figure, in the probability variation / time reduction game state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every variation), By winning a prize ball by entering the large winning opening C10 relating to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player increases. Note that the probability variation / time reduction game state (second limited frequency) of (c) is an ST (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to a maximum of 200 variations, and is a game state with a high profit level for the player. is there.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3D, in the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5B”, the special winning opening C10 is shortly opened (a short time opening in which it is difficult to enter the game ball). Therefore, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and the number of balls possessed by the player does not change (or is small). Here, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5B” is completed, the game is changed to the probability variation / time reduction game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type. In addition, since the upper limit of the probability fluctuation gaming state is also reset, the high profit state up to the maximum 200 fluctuations is started again.

  Next, the section shown in FIG. 11E is the same as the gaming property shown in FIG. Note that the big hit symbol on the second main game side only reaches “5B” for resetting the upper limit number of the probability change game state, and thus reaches the upper limit number of the probability change number (200 changes in this example) (or When the first main game side wins the "7A" symbol), the probability fluctuation / time shortening game state ends.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a timing chart according to a transition of the gaming state in the first modification example from the second embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, a case where a big hit is hit with a “5A” symbol in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state will be described as an example. In the game before 1 in the figure, the fluctuation time on the second main game side tends to be long, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  First, at the timing 1 in the figure, the 2R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "5A". In the present example, in the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A”, since the special winning opening C10 is opened short, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by entering the special winning opening C10.

  Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A” is completed, the game mode shifts to a probability-variation-limited gaming state (so-called ST) with a maximum of 200 variations, , The second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at timing 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol "BK" (at the time of the small hit game, the probability variation occurs). The game state and the time-saving game state are not switched). During the second limited frequency (3-4 and 5-6 in the figure), the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol tends to be short, and the second main game side has a small probability of winning with a high probability. The small hit game will occur continuously.

  Next, at timing 4 in the drawing, the 2R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "5B". In the present example, in the special game relating to the big hit symbol “5A”, since the special winning opening C10 is opened short, it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by entering the special winning opening C10. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched to a non-probable change (non-probability changing game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5B” is finished, the game shifts again to the probability fluctuation game state (so-called ST) up to a maximum of 200 fluctuations, A second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at the timing 6 in the drawing, the probability variation gaming state and the second limited frequency state end when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed 200 times within the period of 5 to 6 in the drawing. . In addition, in the game after 6 in the figure, similarly to the game before 1 in the figure, the fluctuation time of the second main game side tends to be long, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. Become.

  Next, with reference to the lower part of the figure, a case where a big hit with a “7A” symbol in the non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state will be described as an example. First, at the timing of FIG. 7A, the 8R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "7A".

  Next, at the timing of b in the figure, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “7A” is finished, the state shifts to a probability-variable game state with a limited number of times up to 200 fluctuations (so-called ST). However, since the state does not shift to the second limited frequency state, the fluctuation on the second main game side is likely to be long after that, and the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  By making the above changes, the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the second embodiment has a first main game starting port A10 that can always enter a ball and a constantly enterable ball (a first main game starting port). And a second main game start port B10, which is easier to enter than A10), so that the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be changed at the same time. In addition, when the state is not the second limited frequency state, the fluctuation time on the second main game side is likely to be long, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. Further, in the second main game, a small hit is configured with a high probability (in this example, a probability of 1004/1024). Here, when a special jackpot symbol (in this example, “5A” and “5B”) is a big hit, a special game related to the big hit (in this example, a special game in which the big winning opening C10 is opened shortly). After the end of the special game in which it is difficult to enter the game ball), the state shifts to the second limited frequency state (and the probability fluctuation game state) in which the fluctuation time on the second main game side is likely to be short. With this configuration, thereafter, the second limited frequency state ends (in this example, the main game symbol is stopped and displayed at a symbol other than the big hit for 200 consecutive times, or the big hit at the “7A” symbol) Until the end of the game), a small hit is continuously generated, and a new ball is obtained by entering the game ball into the special winning opening C10 opened by the small hit to obtain a prize ball. You can do it. In addition, since it is easy to always enter the second main game start port B10, a second main game start port electric accessory B11d (so-called electric chew) that supports entering the second main game start port B10 is provided. There is no need to provide. As a result, there is an effect that the number of members and the development cost can be reduced.

  In this example, when a big hit or a small hit occurs in one of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, the other symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol. At this time, a configuration is adopted in which the value of the probability change counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c are subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is forcibly stopped, the value of the probability change counter MP51c and the value of the limited frequency counter 53c may not be subtracted.

  Further, in the first modification example from the second embodiment, after the first main game side has a big hit with a “5A” symbol, in the second limited frequency state, when there is no limited frequency (losing variation is 10 to 60). (Second and small hit fluctuations are 75 to 95 seconds), and the fluctuation time of the second main game side is shorter (losing fluctuation is 0.5 seconds and small hit fluctuation is 1 second), so that small hits Has been described as an example in which a pseudo bonus of acquiring a prize ball by a small hit game can be created, but there are other game machine specifications that can be realized by a similar board configuration. For example, when the first main game side does not win a big hit with a “5A” symbol (for example, a big hit hits with a “7A” symbol), a limited frequency state different from the second limited frequency (for example, a loss) By configuring so that the fluctuation is changed to 3 seconds and the small hit fluctuation is set to 1 to 10 seconds, a chance zone for shifting to the second limited frequency state which is a high profit state (the above-described second limited frequency is Gaming machines having different limited frequency states) can be created.

  In addition, a limited frequency A, a limited frequency B, a limited frequency C, and a limited frequency D (variation efficiency of the second main game side: A> B> C> D) are provided, and a large hit or a small hit related to a specific small hit symbol is set. As an opportunity, the limited frequency type may be switched. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, as the big hit (or a specific small hit) continues within the number of STs, the limited frequency type with a higher fluctuation efficiency (= higher profitability of the player) on the second main game side is set. By configuring so as to be switched (that is, rank down of the fluctuation efficiency does not occur), it is possible to create a new game property in which the profit of the player is increased each time the extended play is performed (in this case, the upper limit of the number of ST times) Is reached, the set limited frequency type is reset).

  In the present example, the second main game side is configured to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the second main game side by shifting to the limited frequency state in which the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is short is easy to be selected. , But is not limited to this. For example, since the gaming machine according to the present example is a parallel lottery type gaming machine, by changing to a limited frequency state in which a variation mode in which the variation time on the first main gaming side is long is easily selected, The first main game and the second main game may be configured to improve the relative fluctuation efficiency of the second main game side (the number of executions of the second main game fluctuation with respect to the first main game fluctuation).

(Third embodiment)
Here, at present, in the market, due to the entry of a game ball into a specific area provided in a special winning opening, a gaming machine (a so-called ball-type type) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of a special game Gaming machines). In such a ball game type gaming machine, the special winning game on the first main game side may open the special winning opening in an opening mode in which it is difficult to enter a specific area. In all of the special games described in the above, a large winning opening is opened in an opening mode in which a ball can easily enter a specific area, thereby creating a high profit state with a low rush rate and a high continuation rate. However, many ball-type gaming machines have a similar configuration, and there is a long-awaited demand for a gaming machine with a novel configuration that utilizes the ball-type gaming characteristics. Here, as described in the above embodiment, by combining the gaming ability utilizing the limited frequency and the small hit and the gaming ability of the ball type, a gaming machine having an unprecedented gaming ability. Can be created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. In the third embodiment, the game progression means MP has a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing a distribution game for opening a special winning opening having a specific area.

  First, FIG. 38 is a front view of a gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Here, the description of the same figure largely overlaps the description of FIG. 26 which is a front view of the second embodiment, and therefore, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described. First, the points different from the second embodiment are that a first main game start port (2) A10-2 and a position where the auxiliary game start port H10 is provided, and a second big winning port are provided. It is about.

  In the third embodiment, the first main game start port (2) A10-2 and the auxiliary game start port H10 are provided on the left side of the game area D30, and a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 enters. It is easy for the game ball to flow down the right side of the game area D30. That is, the first main game start port (2) A10-2 and the second main game start port B10 can be punched separately. Further, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is provided with a second special winning opening C20 having a specific area C22 inside. In the description of the third embodiment, the special winning opening C10 in the present embodiment and the second embodiment may be referred to as a first special winning opening C10 in distinction from the second special winning opening C20.

  Next, FIG. 39 is a table configuration diagram of a main game symbol lottery according to the third embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are the small hit probability in the second main game (the description is omitted because it is substantially the same as the second embodiment), the big hit symbol, and the variation mode at the time of the small hit (the second embodiment) The description is omitted because they are substantially the same.

  Here, the big hit symbol is to be selected from 7A on the first main game side and from 4B / 7B on the second main game side. Is executed. As will be described later, in the special game related to 7A and 7B, the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is long opened (the entering of the game ball into the specific area C22 is easy, that is, the probability varying game state). In the special game according to 4B, the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is shortly opened (it is difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area C22, that is, the probability fluctuation). (The transition to the gaming state is not scheduled). The big hit symbol on the first main game side is only "7A" (big hit symbol that is scheduled to shift to the probability variation game state), while the big hit symbol on the second main game side is "4B". (A big hit symbol that is not scheduled to be shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1711 (third) and step 1900 (third), the purpose of which is to execute a sorting game during a special game. That is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1708, or when the special game execution flag is on in step 1710, in step 1711 (third), the special game control It is determined whether or not the currently executed round is a distribution game execution round (3R, 5R in this example). If Yes in step 1711 (third), in step 1900 (third), the distribution game execution control unit MP36 executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1734. On the other hand, if No in step 1711 (third), the process moves to step 1712.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third) of FIG. 40 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1902, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is ON. If Yes in step 1902, the process moves to step 1916. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, in step 1904, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (7A / 7B). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1904, in step 1906, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 determines that the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, An open pattern designed so that the entry into the specific area C22 is definite is set, and the routine goes to Step 1910. In the case of No in step 1904, in step 1908, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 sets a short open pattern (for example, open for 0.1 second) as the open pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an open pattern designed so that non-entry into the specific area C22 is definite is set, and the routine goes to Step 1910.

  Next, in step 1910, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1912, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1914, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big winning opening C20 according to the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1916.

  Next, in step 1916, the distribution game execution control means MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second large winning opening C20. I do. If Yes in step 1916, the process moves to step 1920. On the other hand, if No in Step 1916, in Step 1918, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1918, the process moves to step 1920. Next, in step 1920, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big winning opening C20. Next, in step 1922, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1924, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes at step 1924, at step 1926, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game certain change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1928. . Also in the case of No in step 1924, the process proceeds to step 1928. Next, in step 1928, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1734). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1918, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1734).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 40 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1780, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game certain change transition reservation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1780, in step 1782, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) to the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1784, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game certainty change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1786, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game certain change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1788, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency (if the second limited frequency is set, the fluctuation time on the second main game side becomes extremely short) as the limited frequency type. I do. Next, in step 1789, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MP53c to a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times, preferably the same value as the value to be set to the probability change number counter MP51c). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  In the third embodiment, the probability of a big hit on the second main game side in the probability varying gaming state is approximately 1/100, and the number of times set in the probability variation counter MP51c is 200 times. Is larger than the denominator of the probability of a big hit on the second main game side. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the probability variation gaming state ends without winning a jackpot at the time of transition to the probability variation gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1780, at step 1790, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit symbol related to the executed special game is a short open symbol (4B in this example). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1790, in step 1791, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and wins the special game won in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change). It is determined whether or not the processing has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1791, in step 1792, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) to a time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1793, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency (if the second limited frequency is set, the fluctuation time on the second main game side becomes extremely short) as the limited frequency type. I do. Next, in step 1794, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency counter MP53c to a predetermined number of times (in this example, four times, and the reserved ball remaining on the second main game side before shifting to the time reduction game state). (This is the purpose of fast digestion). Next, in step 1796 and step 1798, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1800). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1790 or 1791, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800). With such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the time reduction game state only after the end of the special game relating to the big hit symbol “4B” on the second main game side during the probability fluctuation game state.

  Next, FIG. 43 is an image diagram relating to the transition of the number of game balls in the third embodiment. First, as shown in the section of FIG. 7A, in the non-stochastic fluctuation / non-time shortening game state, the difference between the number of game balls fired and the prize ball by entering the first main game start port A10. As a result, the ball possessed by the player gradually decreases.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3B, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7A”, a prize ball is paid out by entering the big winning opening C10, thereby holding the player. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “7A” is completed, the game is changed to the probability variation / non-time shortening game state, and the second limited frequency is set as the limited frequency type.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3C, in the probability fluctuation / non-time shortened game state (second limited frequency), a small hit occurs with a probability of 1004/1024 (= almost every fluctuation). By winning the prize ball by entering the special winning opening C10 relating to the small hit, the ball possessed by the player increases. The probability variation / non-time shortened game state (second limited frequency) of (c) is an ST (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to a maximum of 200 variations, and is a gaming state having a high profit for the player. It is.

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 11D, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol “4B”, the prize ball is paid out by entering the big winning opening C10, so that the player's possession is held. The sphere will increase. Here, when the special game relating to the big hit symbol “4B” is completed, the game enters the non-probability variation / time reduction game state.

  Next, as shown in a section (e) of the same figure, in the non-probability change / time shortening game state, the first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d is easily opened, and the player is left. By hitting, the game ball is fired toward the first main game start port (2) A10-2, and the game mainly on the first main game side is executed. In addition, in this example, when the big hit symbol “4B” becomes a big hit and shifts to the time-reduced game state, the second main game-side hold (remaining hold) is completed in a short time. Only the four fluctuations are configured to have the second limited frequency (when the state shifts to the time-reduced game state, if the second main game side has a hold, if the second main game side has a hold of 75 to This is to prevent the progress of the game from being substantially paused because the pattern fluctuation, which is a long time of 95 seconds, is easily selected. (A first main game priority digestion type in which the symbol change is executed with priority, or a parallel lottery type in which the first main game symbol change and the second main game symbol change can be executed simultaneously).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a timing chart according to the transition of the gaming state in the third embodiment. First, at timing 1 in the figure, the 5R special game is executed when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "7A". In this example, in the special game related to the big hit symbol "7A", a distribution game in which the second big winning port C20 having the specific area C22 is long opened (easily entering a game ball) is executed.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the special game related to the big hit symbol “7A” ends, and in the sorting game during the special game, due to the detection of the ball entering the specific area C22, A transition is made to a probability-variable / non-time-shortened game state in which the number is limited to a maximum of 200 fluctuations, and the second limited frequency is set.

  Next, at timing 3 in the figure, the small hit game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol "BK" (at the time of the small hit game, the probability variation occurs). The game state and the time-saving game state are not switched). During the second limited frequency (3 to 4 in the figure), the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol tends to be short, and the second main game side has a small probability of winning with a high probability. This occurs continuously (the same applies to periods 5 to 6 in the figure, but if there is no remaining hold on the second main game side, the game on the first main game side is executed) Therefore, small hit games are unlikely to occur).

  Next, at timing 4 in the figure, the 5R special game is executed when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol "4B". In the present example, in the special game relating to the big hit symbol “4B”, a distribution game in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is shortly opened (difficult to enter a game ball) is executed. At this time, the special game winning probability is switched between a non-probable change (non-probability changing game state) and a non-time saving (non-time shortened game state).

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the special game relating to the big hit symbol “4B” is completed, the game mode shifts to a non-probability variation / time reduction game state (time reduction game state up to a maximum of 50 variations). . In addition, only the first four fluctuations in the time reduction game state are configured to have the second limited frequency.

  Next, at the timing 6 in the figure, the second limited frequency state ends when the first four fluctuations in the time reduction game state end. Although not particularly shown in the present example, in a case where there is no situation where the second main game side has a remaining hold (for example, after the end of the special game relating to the big hit when the second limited frequency is not in progress, the time reduction game state ), The first four fluctuations in the time reduction game state may not be the second limited frequency.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, after the end of the special game related to the big hit on the first main game side (in particular, when the game ball enters the specific area C22) In the case), the state shifts to the probability variation / non-time shortening game state with the frequency limit, and the state becomes the second limited frequency state. In the second limited frequency state, the variation time of the second main game symbol is likely to be short, and in the second main game, a small hit is obtained with a high probability (in this example, a probability of 1004/1024). It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second limited frequency state, a small hit game is continuously generated, and a high prize ball can be obtained by entering the large winning opening C10 related to the small hit game. A profitable period can be created. Note that, during the high profit period, the probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state due to the number limit is ended, or a special game in which the ball is not entered into the specific area C22 (for example, the second large winning opening C20 is shortened). The game ends when the special game to be released) ends. Here, the end of the special game in which the ball has not entered the specific area C22 (for example, the special game in which the second large winning opening C20 is short-opened) is not the end of the probability variation / non-time shortening game state due to the number of times limit. When the second limited frequency state ends due to the above, the game shifts to a time shortening game state (a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is increased) up to a maximum of 50 fluctuations. Further, when a big hit occurs on the first main game side, a transition may be made to a limited frequency state. On the other hand, on the second main game side, if there is a big hit (especially a big hit related to the big hit symbol “4B”) in the probability fluctuation / non-time shortening game state (limited frequency state), the non-probability fluctuation / time reduction game On the other hand, when the state shifts to the state, if there is a big hit (especially a big hit related to the big hit symbol "4B") when the game is not in the (limited frequency state), the game is not set to the non-probability fluctuation / time shortening game state. That is, in the normal state (non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortened game state), if the first main game side hits a big hit, regardless of the presence or absence of a ball in the specific area C22 in the special game state, the limited frequency state is set. It may be configured to make a transition, and when a big hit occurs on the second main game side during normal times, regardless of the presence or absence of a ball in the specific area C22 during the special game state, the transition to the time reduction game state is not performed. You may comprise.

  In the gaming machine according to the present example, even in a normal state (non-probability fluctuation / non-time shortened game state), a ball is input to the second main game start port B10 in which a game ball can be entered (or easily). In this case, a small hit occurs with a high probability, and a small hit game in which the large winning opening C10 is opened is executed. Therefore, in a normal time, the player is prevented from acquiring a prize ball by hitting the small hit by hitting the ball right (in particular, a single shot of stopping the launch of the game ball when the second main game starts). It is desirable. In the present example, the symbol fluctuation time on the second main game side in the normal time is long and is configured to be selected from a plurality of patterns (in this example, 75 seconds, 85 seconds, and 95 seconds), thereby preventing shooting and shooting. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of patterns of demonstration time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (and / or a long time) may be provided. A plurality of opening patterns of the winning opening C10 are provided (for example, a pattern of opening once and a pattern of opening twice), or a game ball fired at the timing of the stop display of the small hit symbol is a big win related to the small hit game. By the end of opening of the mouth C10, it may be configured such that it is impossible or difficult to reach the special winning opening C10 (for example, a board configuration for reducing the speed of the game ball, or a special winning from the launch position of the game ball) Distance to C10 can be realized by a long board configuration).

  Here, of the above-described embodiments, an embodiment having a game property of acquiring a prize ball mainly by a small hit is a second embodiment, a modification example 1 from the second embodiment, a third embodiment, (2) In the variation on the main game side, almost every variation (with a probability of 1020/1024), a small hit occurs. In order to configure so that the player obtains a profit by continuing to right-hand, Number of winning balls in winning opening) × (expected value of winning balls in large winning opening) × (expected value of the number of small hits per minute)｝ that is, expected value of the number of winning prize balls per minute> (games per minute) (The number of spheres fired).

  For example, as in the above embodiment, when the number of winning balls in the special winning opening is 13, the expected number of entering balls in the special winning opening is 3, and the number of firing game balls per minute is 100, By configuring the number of small hits per minute to exceed “2.56” (ie, small hits occur more frequently than once every 23.4 seconds), the player can benefit. This is a possible design value. Here, regarding the demonstration time in the small hitting game, based on the example, if the small hitting variation is 1 second, and as in the previous example, the opening time of the special winning opening relating to the small hitting is 1.7 seconds, By setting the total value of the time of the small hit start demonstration and the end demonstration to be less than 20.7 seconds, the design value is such that the player can obtain a profit. However, since this is just a break-even point, if you want to secure a plus of around 100 shots per minute, the expected number of small hits per minute is 5 (* once every 12 seconds ... 13 (3 × 5 = 195 shots) is preferable (in that case, the total value of the small hit start demonstration / end demonstration time may be 9.3 seconds).

  In addition, in the case of the above design values, it is preferable to prevent the aim hitting / stopping by making the small hit start demo / end demo time different according to the small hit symbol (for opening the big winning opening). By launching the game balls at the same time, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls fired per minute and increase the profit). For example, the effect of aiming and hitting may be reduced by reducing the number of winning balls in the special winning opening. In order to secure profit, the expected number of small hits per minute (or the special winning opening) It is necessary to increase the expected number of entering balls) (that is, to shorten the time of the small hit start demonstration and the end demonstration). In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the advantage of the irregular hit in which the player hits the ball at right time in normal times to obtain a prize ball by a small hit. Here, if the player wants to obtain 195 prize balls per minute in the same manner as in the above design while reducing the number of prize balls in the special winning opening, 5 prize balls × 3 prize balls × 1 minute A design of 13 small hits per hit = 195 balls can be assumed. In this case, the small hit only needs to be hit once every 4.61 seconds, so that the total value of the small hit start demonstration and the end demonstration time may be set to 1.91 seconds. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of aiming and hitting without changing the demo time according to the design in order to prevent aiming and hitting. To fire repeatedly).

  However, as the number of small hits per minute increases, the time during which the advantageous state lasts becomes shorter. Since “the number of small hits per minute is large = the number of times the main game symbol fluctuates is large”, the disadvantageous big hit in the second main game symbol (a big hit in which the advantageous state ends, for example, “ The possibility of winning the “4B” big hit) increases per unit time, and the time to complete the ST200 fluctuation also decreases. Therefore, the expected value of the number of winning balls in the special winning opening, the expected number of small hits per minute (per unit time), and the expected value of the number of winning balls in the special winning opening may be adjusted according to the effect to be executed. Here, as a method of adjusting the expected value of the number of small hits per minute (per unit time), the probability of a big hit (and the number of STs) during ST may be adjusted. , The big hit probability during ST may be reduced (at the same time, the continuation rate of the advantageous state can be maintained by increasing the number of times of ST).

(Fourth embodiment)
In the configuration as described in the above embodiment, by setting the interval of small hits to be a short period, the speed of increasing the number of game balls by acquiring in the small hit game is faster than the decreasing speed of the number of game balls by launching. It is configured to exceed, and it is assumed that it is a game that can obtain a ball by continuous occurrence of small hit games, but using such an idea, it is possible to further create a novel game that is different from the above-mentioned game is there. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the third embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, since the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the third embodiment, it is also supplemented that any of the configurations shown in the third embodiment can be applied in the fourth embodiment. .

  First, FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the fourth embodiment. First, the second special winning opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). The winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out opening D36 and on the upper right of the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (and the second special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C24). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second special winning opening entering information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. Generate The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric role-playing object C21d sets the second big winning opening C20 in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the second big winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. (Varies by exciting the second winning port solenoid C24). Note that, in the fourth embodiment, the second special winning opening electric auditorium C21d is a plate-shaped member like the first special winning opening electric auditorium C11d. Different from the aspect, an aspect is adopted in which it is variable in a direction perpendicular to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an evacuation state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) until approaching the board D16 is adopted. Then, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d protrudes from the game board (game area D30), thereby receiving a box-shaped member C20-1 (in this box-shaped member) capable of receiving a game ball flowing down the game area D30. The game ball that has entered enters the second special winning opening C20) serves as a lid, that is, when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20- In the case where the game ball can enter into the first large winning opening C20 (and within the second winning opening C20), the box-shaped member C20-1 (in the second winning winning opening C20d) takes the advanced state. Further, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second large winning opening C20) (the box-shaped member is substantially closed).

  Note that the first special winning opening C10 is provided with the specific area C22 described above in the third embodiment, and the first special winning opening C10 is opened in the sorting game execution round in the special game. During the normal round (a round other than the distribution game execution round in the special game) and the small hit game in the special game, the second big winning opening C20 is opened.

  Regarding the game content developed on the game board, first, a game ball fired toward the game area D30 is a downflow route (hereinafter, left strike) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The flow may be referred to as a right-handed route or a down-flow route formed on the right side of the game area D30 (referred to as the center of the game area). Divided. Here, the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the left first main game starting port A10-1 or the first big winning port C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route. Can get an opportunity to enter the auxiliary game starting port H10, the second big winning port C20, the right first main game starting port A10-2, the second main game starting port B10, and the first big winning port C10. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to be easier to enter the first large winning opening C10 than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route (“Entering Ball”). "Easy" and "difficult to enter" are determined, for example, by the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are fired on a right-hit route and a left-hit route, respectively.)

  On the left-handed route (not shown), the game balls are guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. Adopts various flowing modes, on the right-handed route (not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is smaller than that of the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flowing manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball fired aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is the maximum, also referred to as right-handed) , Jumps in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32, and collides with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area), thereby falling due to its own weight. Start. Next, after the dropped game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below the ball with a high probability, the flow passage width becomes larger than one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected at D50 (regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, after the game ball flowing down along the straightening passage D50 is released from the exit of the straightening passage D50, the first-stage passage D51 is slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction and has a three-stage configuration. 1, after rolling on each of the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3, they are discharged toward the out port D36.

  Here, the first-stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3 are formed. A game ball passage formed of a synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed to a game board in advance. In other words, when the second special winning opening electric auditorium C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first special winning opening electric auditorium C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the exit of the rectification passage D50. Game balls released from the first stage passage D51-1 roll on the first stage passage D51-1 → game balls released from the first stage passage D51-1 roll on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3. The game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36. , And so on.

  In this way, since the game balls that flow down the right-handed route adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at approximately 0.6 second intervals), the auxiliary When the ball stably enters the game start port H10 and the second big winning port electric accessory C21d is in an opened state (evacuated state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the second big winning port). When the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d is in an open state, the ball can be stably entered into the first large winning opening C10. In addition, in the space until the game ball discharged from the second-stage passage D51-2 reaches the third-stage passage D51-3, there is a first main game start port electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state. The object A11-2d is provided, and when the first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d enters the advanced state, the game ball can be guided to the right first main game starting port A10-2. Is configured.

  In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the exit of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first-stage passage D51-1, that is, the second large winning opening electric auditorium C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, the second special winning opening electric auditors product C21d may be damaged. Therefore, at least at the exit of the rectification passage D50, a configuration for reducing the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially falling) in the rectification passage D50 is essential. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the figure near the outlet of the rectification passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectification passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the rectification passage D50. When the ball falls in a zigzag manner, it is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball. In the fourth embodiment, a structure for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is provided with the same theory. Points will be described later.

  Next, a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, the first-stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The big winning opening electric accessory C21d itself is a plate-shaped member. Therefore, since the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, unless some measure is taken to reduce the momentum of the game ball, Even if the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state, in particular, a series of displacement from the advanced state to the retracted state to the advanced state is instantaneously performed (for example, about 0.1 second). ), There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be successfully guided to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and, consequently, in the second big winning opening C20). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, as in the flow path shape provided near the exit of the rectification passage D50, a device is provided for the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 to progress in a zigzag manner. is there.

  More specifically, within a range in which the game ball rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1, a plurality of projections D51-1-1 are provided on the surface side of the game board, and a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the transparent plate D16 side. And the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are arranged alternately. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the surface of the game board, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are directly formed on the rear surface of the transparent plate D16. If the sticking is performed, the plurality of projections D51-1-2 are exposed to the outside when the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine or the like. There is a possibility that a person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (in the worst case, it will peel off) (it will also be difficult to reuse the transparent plate D16 as a member of another gaming machine) . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the fourth embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side among the wall surfaces of the box-shaped member C20-1 is connected to the second winning combination electric motor in the advanced state. The plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are configured to extend upward from the object C21d and to be fixed to the wall surface of the elongated box-shaped member C20-1.

  As described above, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within a range in which the game ball rolls on the first step passage D51-1, the first step is performed. Since the game balls rolling on the passage D51-1 progress zigzag, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to decrease. Here, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game balls discharged from the exit of the straightening passage D50 is reduced. Since the game ball that reaches the first-stage passage D51-1 and rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, it is rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extending Can successfully guide the game ball to the second big winning opening C20). In addition, the fact that the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is decelerated means that when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the distance between the game balls is reduced. (The traffic ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 causes a traffic jam). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls exist on the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1). In this case, the second special winning prize is provided. Even if the mouth-powered accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of the plurality of pieces are transferred to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and, consequently, in the second big winning opening C20). It is also possible to collectively guide the game balls (an image diagram is shown in the lower part of the figure).

  Next, an operation mode of the first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, in the space until the game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 reaches the third-stage passage D51-3, the first main ball, which can take a retracted state and an advanced state, is provided. A game starting port electric accessory A11-2d is provided (the meaning of the evacuation state and the advance state is the same as that of the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d, but as will be described below, the first primary In the case of the game starting port electric accessory A11-2d, when the advancing state is taken, the right first main game starting port A10-2 is in an open state in which a game ball easily enters, and when the evacuation state is taken, the right first main game starting port A10-2 becomes the open state. (1) The game ball is in a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the main game start port A10-2). Here, in the fourth embodiment, even if the first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d in the retreat state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (open state). When a series of displacements from the state → the advance state → the evacuation state is instantaneously performed (for example, in about 0.1 second), it is assumed that the ball does not enter the right first main game start port A10-2. It is configured so that it can be physically secured.

  The left first main game start port A10-1 has a left first main game start port entrance ball detection device A11s-1 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the left first main game start port A10-1. The right first main game start port A10-2 is a right first main game start port entrance ball detection device A11s-2 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right first main game start port A10-2. have. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the two first main game starting ports can be driven separately by right-handed and left-handed. Although the game start port A10-2 is used, the first main game start port (1) A10 and the first main game start port (2) A10-2 described above may be used (see FIG. 38).

  In the fourth embodiment, in the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state), if the player hits the ball left, it is possible to enter the left first main game start port A10-1 (or In the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state), if the player hits right, the ball can enter the second main game start port B10 (or can easily enter the ball). ).

  Further, the third-stage passage D51-3 can be driven in the left-right direction when viewed from the player. It is configured to continue driving. The stay time of the third-stage passage D51-3 is configured such that the stay time at the left position is relatively longer than the stay time at the right position. When the third step passage D51-3 is at the left position, the game ball flowing down the right-handed route is unlikely to enter the second main game start port B10 (or impossible), and the first large winning port. On the other hand, when the third-stage passage D51-3 is at the right position, it is easy to enter the second main game starting port B10, and it is difficult to be guided to the first big winning port C10. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, almost all of the game balls flowing down the right-handed route and flowing down to the vicinity of the second main game start port B10 are prevented from entering the second main game start port B10. The ball entry efficiency is adjusted.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 5 in the fourth embodiment. This drawing has the same processing as that of FIG. 34 in the first modification example from the second embodiment, that is, the main game symbols of both the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are simultaneously drawn in parallel. , So-called parallel lottery can be executed.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 48 in the fourth embodiment. This drawing is similar to the first modification from the second embodiment, and therefore, points different from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described. The difference from the first modification example from the second embodiment is step 1410-3 (fourth), whose purpose is to determine the jackpot winning probability and the small hit winning probability at the time of executing the parallel lottery, as described later. Adjusting and, when staying in a certain game state, uniforming the selection tendency (in other words, a lottery table used when selecting the fluctuation time) related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol (a certain game) If the user stays in the state, the lottery table is not changed). That is, after determining the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-3 (fourth), the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination unit MN51) -B) refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and determines whether or not the main game symbol success / failure lottery result Based on the first main game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the first (second) main game symbol is determined, and the first and second variation patterns are determined. The main game symbol information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage unit MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1412.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process in the fourth embodiment. First, as a feature of the main game table 1 (table for lottery lottery), a small hit is provided on each of the first main game side and the second main game side, and a big hit is obtained as a result of the lottery lottery. The probability is 5/1024 during the non-probability variation game and 7/1024 during the probability variation game. In addition, the probability of a small hit as a result of the win / fail lottery of the first main game side is 17/1024, and the probability of a small hit as a result of the win / loss lottery of the second main game side is 1016/1024. In addition, the probability of a loss as a result of the success / failure lottery of the first main game side is 1002/1024 for a non-probability variation game and 1000/1024 for a probability variation game. The probability of loss as a result is 3/1024 at the time of the non-probability variation game, and 1/1024 at the time of the probability variation game. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the second main game side is configured so that the winning / rejection lottery result is almost a small hit. In both the non-probability-variable gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state, the first main gaming side has a selection ratio of “losing ≧ small hit ≧ big hit” as a result of the winning / rejecting lottery. On the other hand, on the second main game side, in both the non-probability-variable gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state, the selection ratio is “small hit ≧ big hit ≧ loss” as a result of the win / fail lottery. In the first main game side, it is only necessary that the loss is most easily selected, and random numbers may be distributed such that “loss> big hit ≧ small hit” (particularly, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. Good). In addition, on the second main game side, it is sufficient that the small hit is most easily selected, and random numbers may be distributed such that “small hit ≧ loose ≧ big hit”.

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 2 (symbol determination table), the first main game side is provided with a big hit symbol (4A in this example) in which the second big winning opening C20 is shortly opened. On the other hand, the second main game side is configured such that a big hit symbol in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened shortly is not provided. The big hit symbol with the largest total number of prize balls in one big hit is “7A ・ 7B” in which the 16R special game is executed, and a maximum of “2400 balls” is paid out (details). Will be described later).

  Next, as a feature of the main game table 3 (change mode determination table), on the second main game side, in the probability change game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state). , Only the shortest fluctuation time (1 second in this example) is selected regardless of the result. With such a configuration, in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state), when right-handed execution is performed, small hits continuously occur at short time intervals. It is configured to keep winning (the effect created by this configuration will be described later). In addition, in a gaming state (especially a non-probability varying gaming state) other than a probability varying gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (a so-called non-electric support state with a latent probability variation state), a relatively short-term variation occurs during a big hit. Only the time (5 seconds in this example) is selected, and only a relatively long fluctuation time (100 minutes or more in this example) is selected at the time of loss or small hit. It has become. In addition, the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of the big hit in the normal game state (the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state), and the average fluctuation time in the normal game state (the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state) The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit is “the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit in the normal game state> the average fluctuation of the second main game symbol in the normal game state during the big hit. Time "relationship. In addition, in the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state), the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol other than the big hit, the probability fluctuation game state and non-time shortening game state (so-called non-electric support state) The average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the latent probability change state with "the average fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the normal game state other than at the time of big hit> probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state 2 average fluctuation time of the main game symbol ". Also, after the timing when the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called non-electric support state with latent probability change state) end, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol becomes extremely long, At the timing, there is a high possibility that the second main game suspension remains, and there is a concern that the progress of the game will be hindered when the game proceeds by left-handing after the timing. Therefore, in order to forcibly stop the remaining reservation by losing (to allow the remaining reservation to be lost as losing), a small hit on the first main game side appears at an appropriate frequency (17/1024 in this example). (Variation time in this case is 3 seconds). Specifically, during the change of the second main game symbol (especially, during the change of the symbol related to the small hit symbol), the symbol change related to the small hit symbol of the first main game side ends, and the first main game side changes. When the small hitting game is started, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped at the lost symbol, whereby the fluctuation of the second main game symbol can be ended, and the second main game can be ended. The small hit game on the side can be prevented from being executed. In addition, in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, the start of the small hit game on the second main game side, the fluctuation of the fluctuating first main game symbol is forcibly stopped in a lost symbol, In the fourth embodiment, the probability change game state and the non-time change game state are changed by a predetermined number of times (in this example, 200 times) of the main game symbol in the big hit or the probability change game state and the non-time shortening game state on the second main game side. Since the game property is such that the time-reduced game state can be ended, in the probability-variable game state and in the non-time-reduced game state, all stop symbols related to the fluctuation on the first main game side are configured to be lost symbols. .

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the other main game side is changing symbols at the timing when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol stops, the symbol change of the other main game side is forcibly made by a lost symbol. Although it is configured to stop, but is not limited to this, when the fluctuation of the other main game symbol is started during the fluctuation of a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol, the change is started at the fluctuation start timing The other main game symbol may be forcibly converted to a winning / losing result of the other main game symbol to be lost, and the fluctuation of the other main game symbol may be stopped at a fluctuation stop timing of a certain big hit symbol or small hit symbol.

  It should be noted that the configuration of the main game table 3 (change mode determination table) in the fourth embodiment can be changed without any problem. For example, (1) a case where the game state is not the probability change game state and the non-time shortening game state The first main game side can shift to the limited frequency state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. (2) When the game state is not the non-time shortening game state and the probability fluctuation game state, the first main game symbol (3) When the game state is not the non-time shortening game state and the probability fluctuation game state, the average value of the fluctuation time related to the first main game side is (4) Probability-variable gaming state and non-time, which is medium time (shorter than the long time on the second main game side and longer than the short time on the second main game side, for example, 30 seconds). Games that are not in reduced gaming state In the state, the second main gaming side does not shift to the limited frequency state (even if the first main gaming side is in the limited frequency state), and (5) the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. When there is no gaming state, the type of the variation mode related to the second main game symbol side is small (for example, one type). (6) When the gaming state is not the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, (2) When the average value of the fluctuation time relating to the main game symbol is a long time (for example, 100 minutes), (7) in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, the first main game side has a limitation. (8) In the case of the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, the type does not change to the first main game symbol side (the probability variation game state is not the non-time reduction game state). Playing state (For example, 5 types), (9) the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and the first main game symbol side. (10) If the average value of the fluctuation time is short (for example, 3 seconds), and if the (10) probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, the second main game side does not shift to the limited frequency state. (11) In the case of the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, there are few types of variation modes related to the second main game symbol side (the case of the gaming state which is not the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state). (For example, 5 types), (12) the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and the second main game symbol side The average value of the fluctuation time is short (for example, (For example, 3 seconds). (All the configurations of (1) to (12) may be simultaneously satisfied or may be appropriately combined.) Further, all of the configurations (1) to (12) may be configured to be applied only at the time of losing. Further, in the probability varying gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the first main gaming side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state upon satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and may be configured as such. By doing so, it is possible to execute a parallel lottery, and when performing a right-handed operation in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, which one of the first primary gaming starting port and the second primary gaming starting port In the case where the first main game symbol is changed to the limited frequency state, by increasing the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol, the first main game side wins a big hit. The average time can be lengthened, that is, the time in which the small hits on the second main game side continue can be lengthened. In addition, the predetermined condition serving as a condition for shifting to the limited frequency state described above is, for example, a stop of a specific symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or the likelihood that the cumulative number of symbol fluctuations after the end of the big hit or the small hit is a predetermined number. Reach. The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol according to the predetermined condition may be all big hit symbols and / or all small hit symbols, or may be specific big hit symbols and / or specific small hit symbols.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third) of FIG. 40 in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 1904 (fourth). That is, if the sorting game execution flag is off in step 1902 (that is, at the start of the round), step 1904 (fourth) is performed. ), The distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (a big hit symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 is long open). In the present example, it is determined whether or not 5A, 7A, 5B, and 7B). If Yes in step 1904 (fourth), the process moves to step 1906; if No, the process moves to step 1908. In the third embodiment, the special winning opening to be opened in the sorting game execution round is the second special winning opening C20, but in the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening to be opened in the sorting game executing round is set. The mouth is the first big winning opening C10.

  Here, the chart at the top of the figure is the average number of prize balls per big hit in the fourth embodiment. As shown in the table, in the fourth embodiment, the big hit symbol having the largest total prize ball count in one big hit is "7A / 7B", and the largest hit symbol is "15 balls x 10 balls x 16R". Is arranged to pay out “2400 balls” (the effect created by this configuration will be described later in detail). In the fourth embodiment, the distribution game execution round is “3R, 5R” in all the big hit symbols.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 40 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1799-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the inside of the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game certain change transition reservation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1799-1, in step 1799-2, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1799-3, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1799-4, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game certain change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1799-5, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the stopped symbol related to the completed special game is a probable change / hour saving big hit symbol (in this example, 7A / 7B). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1799-5, in step 1799-6, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number A (200 times in this example) to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and in step 1799-9, Transition.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1799-1, in step 1799-7, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the stopped symbol related to the finished special game is the In the example, it is determined whether or not 4A). In the case of Yes in step 1799-7, in step 1799-8, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number B (50 times in this example), and in step 1799-9. Transition.

  Next, in step 1799-9, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1800). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1799-5 or step 1799-7, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1800).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a transition is made to the probability-variable gaming state, the predetermined number of changes in the main game symbol from the end of the special game related to the transition (stop of the big hit symbol related to the special game) , The probability variation game state ends (transition to the normal game state) (so-called ST). In addition, a gaming machine (a so-called ball game type game machine) that shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game due to the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area C22 provided in the first special winning opening C10. Machine). In addition, after the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “5A / 5B” (and the special game when the ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game related to “4A”) The game is configured so as to be in a probability variation game state and a non-time shortened game state (a so-called latent probability change state with a so-called non-electric support state) at a later time but basically do not enter the ball (No in step 1799-5). Is a part of the case where the stop symbol is "5A / 5B" or the case where the stop symbol is "4A"). In the fourth embodiment, the probability is set when the ball enters the specific area C22 (when the main game certain change transition reservation flag is turned on) during the special game related to the time-saving big hit symbol (4A). Although it is configured to shift to the variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the probability varying gaming state and the time reducing gaming state, the non-probability varying gaming state and the time reducing gaming state (the time saving number counter MP52c includes a step 1799- It may be configured to shift to a normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state).

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 5 in the fourth embodiment. The differences from the third embodiment are steps 1828 (fourth) to step 1836 (fourth). The purpose is to provide a small hit to the player in the case of a small hit occurring on the first main game side. The prize ball is not provided and the prize ball is provided to the player when a small hit occurs on the second main game side. That is, after the small hit execution flag is turned on in step 1806, in step 1828 (fourth), the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and the stop symbol is the first main game small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol (AK in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1828 (fourth), in step 1830 (fourth), the small hitting game control means MP40 causes the small hitting game timer MP41t to set the first opening time (the small hitting game execution related to the first main game). (In this example, 0.1 second), and the flow proceeds to step 1810. On the other hand, if No in step 1828 (fourth), in other words, if the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (BK in this example), in step 1832 (fourth), the small hit game control means MP40 sets a second opening time (a time set at the time of executing the small hitting game relating to the second main game, in this example, 1.7 seconds) to the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1834 (fourth), the small hitting game control means MP40 sets a small hitting start command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hitting game has been started (the control command transmitting process in step 1999). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1810. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the small hit start command is set only when the small hit game relating to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side is executed. It is not set at the time of executing the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side. Therefore, when the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is stopped, even if the player visually recognizes the effect, it is difficult to detect the small hit and it is difficult to obtain a game ball by the small hit. (Because you did not perform right-handed). Note that the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is a long-term fluctuation (100) of the second main game symbol in the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state). The role of forcibly stopping the change of more than one second) with a lost symbol. For example, triggered by the cumulative number of changes of the main game symbol, the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortened game state (so-called latent change state with a non-electric support state). When the game mode shifts to a normal game state (a non-probability changing game state and a non-time shortening game state) from the second game mode, it plays a role of forcibly stopping the remaining symbol change related to the hold of the second main game side. In addition, at the time of the execution of the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side, and the small hit game related to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) of the second main game side. In any case, a small hit start command may be set. In such a case, a small hit symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side is set. It is desirable that the small hit start command set at the time of executing the hit game and the small hit start command set at the time of executing the small hit game relating to the small hit symbol (BK in this example) of the second main game side be different commands. For example, at the time of executing the small hitting game related to the small hitting symbol (AK in this example) on the first main game side, the right on the effect display device SG which is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the display area is small). Display the batting instruction display (may be without sound) At the time of executing the small hitting game related to the small hitting symbol (BK in this example) on the second main game side, a right-handed instruction display that is easy for the player to visually recognize (for example, has a large display area) on the effect display device SG. May be displayed (may be notified by voice).

  Also, when a predetermined number (in this example, 10) is won in the second large winning opening C20 in step 1816, or when the small hitting timer MP41t reaches a predetermined time (open time has elapsed) in step 1818. In step 1836 (fourth), the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the game state temporary storage means MB to determine whether or not the stop symbol is the second main game small hit symbol (BK in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1836 (fourth), in step 1820, the small hitting game control means MP40 sets a small hitting end command (command to the sub side) indicating that the small hitting game has ended (the control in step 1999). The command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the command transmission process), and the flow shifts to step 1822. If No in step 1836 (fourth), in other words, if the stop symbol is the first main game small hit symbol (AK in this example), the process also proceeds to step 1822 (the small hit described above). Like the start command, the small hit end command is set only during the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol). In the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening opened in the small hitting game is the second special winning opening C20.

  Here, the chart at the top of the figure is the average number of prize balls for each small hit symbol in the fourth embodiment. As shown in the table, in the fourth embodiment, the average total prize ball count in one small hit (ie, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player by one small hit) is “ In the case of “AK”, the number is relatively small as “1.5 balls”, while in the case of “BK”, the number is relatively large as “15 balls”. At the time of winning, in many cases, it is configured such that no game ball enters the second big winning opening C20, while at the time of small winning related to “BK”, in many cases, the second big winning opening C20 is formed. It is configured such that one or more game balls enter C20.

  Next, FIG. 54 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the third embodiment is step 2050 (fourth) and step 2500 (fourth), that is, in step 2050 (fourth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM is described later. A right-handed instruction display control process is performed. Further, after executing the special game related display control processing in step 2400, in step 2500 (fourth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes the small hit game related display control processing described later, Move to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a right-handing instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fourth) of FIG. 53 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2052, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in Step 2052, in Step 2054, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol relating to the currently executing small hit is "AK" (No. (1) The main game small hit symbol, in which the second large winning opening C20 is opened for a short time at the time of executing the small hitting game, and the small winning symbol is intended not to prompt the player to enter the second large winning opening C20. ) Is determined. Here, as a supplement to the process, if the small hit symbol relating to the currently executing small hit is "AK", the right-handed instruction display is not displayed. While it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not the small hit is being executed, if the small hit symbol relating to the small hit currently being executed is “BK”, a right-handed instruction display is displayed, so that Is easy to visually recognize whether or not a small hit is executed. In addition, even when the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “AK”, a right-handed instruction display may be displayed. In such a case, the right hitting symbol related to “AK” may be displayed. It is desirable that the hitting instruction display is configured to have lower visibility (not noticeable) for the player than the right-hitting instruction display related to another small hit symbol (“BK” in this example). In addition, even if the small hit symbol is the same, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be changed depending on the gaming state at the time of the small hit symbol winning. In the non-time shortening game state (so-called non-electric support state), when the small hitting game related to “AK” is won in the non-time shortening game state, the right-hand instruction display is not executed, and the time shortening game state (so-called electric power support state) is not executed. When the small hit game related to “AK” is won in the support state), a right-handed instruction display may be executed. Note that the visibility is a transmittance or a display area occupancy such as how much the display area SG10 occupies in the entire display area SG10, and is not limited to the visibility. (It is also possible to determine the presence or absence of sound or effect light emission). If Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (the display command transmission control processing in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2052 or Step 2054, in Step 2058, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and changes the current game state to the time shortened game state (so-called power state). (Support state). In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS Side) and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2058, in step 2062, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability varying gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2062, in step 2064, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the second right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS Side) and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). As described above, the fourth embodiment is configured such that the right-handed instruction display can be displayed even in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (so-called latent probability changing state with the non-electric support state). The right-handed instruction display (second right-handed instruction display) in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortened gaming state (so-called non-electric support state with a latent probability change state) is accompanied by the time shortened gaming state (so-called electric support state). The display mode is different from the right-handed instruction display (first right-handed instruction display) in the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state, and in the non-probability varying game state and the time shortening game state (the latent probability changing state). Since the special playability is to make a right strike at the time, the purpose is to transmit the special playability to the player). The right-handed instruction display executed in step 2064 may be a third right-handed instruction display different from other right-handed instruction displays, and the third right-handed instruction display is different from the first right-handed instruction display. May be configured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the display area is small on the effect display device SG).

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. The first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are displayed at positions where they do not overlap on the effect display device SG. In the present example, there are two types of right-handed instruction display (first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display), but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be provided or the same. A plurality of types of right-handed instruction displays may be displayed in the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2062, in step 2066, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2066, in step 2068, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS Side) and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2066, in step 2070, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for erasing the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (display command transmission in step 2999). In the control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the small hit game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fourth) in FIG. 54 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the small hit flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit start command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the small hit start display (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999). . Next, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2528. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2520, the process shifts to step 2528.

  Next, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a small hit end command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2528, in step 2530 the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to small hit end display (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). . Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2522 or step 2528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999). In addition, as described above, the purpose of transmitting the effect that the small hit has been executed to the player by the effect is to obtain the payout by the small hit game and further increase the payout by the continuous occurrence of the small hit game. Therefore, during execution of the small hit, it is preferable to display the number of occurrences of the small hit and the accumulated number of payouts (payout number) obtained by the continuous occurrence of the small hit game.

  Next, FIG. 57 is an image diagram related to a change in the number of game balls in the fourth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the figure, in the normal gaming state (non-probability varying gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the number of launched game balls and the left first main gaming starting port A10-1 Due to the difference from the prize ball due to entering the ball, the ball possessed by the player gradually decreases.

  Next, as shown in the section of the same figure (b), during the special game related to the big hit symbol "5A", a right-handed game is played, and the prize ball by the ball entering the first big winning opening C10 is obtained. By being paid out, the number of balls held by the player increases. Thereafter, when the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A” is completed, the game is changed to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-saving game state (so-called latent change state with the non-electric support state). In addition, if the second main game symbol is being displayed while the big hit symbol "5A" is stopped and displayed (such a phenomenon may occur because a so-called parallel lottery is employed). Even if the second main game symbol is to be stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol.

  Next, as shown in the section (c) of the same figure, in the winning and losing lottery of the second main game side in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state), , 1016/1024 (= approximately every variation), a small hit is won, and in the latent change probability state, the symbol change related to the small hit win is short (1 second in this example). By paying out prize balls by entering the second large winning opening C20 relating to the small hit, the number of balls held by the player increases. The (c) probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (so-called latent probability change state with a non-electric support state) are ST (probability variation game state with a limited number of times) up to 200 variations. In the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (so-called non-electric support state), the probability of a big hit is 7/1024 per variation. Since the small hits are won on average 145 times by the 146 symbol fluctuations, the total of the small hits related to the second main game during the stay in the (c) probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state is calculated. The average prize ball count is 2175 balls.

  Next, as shown in the section (d) of the same figure, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol "7B", a prize ball is paid out by entering the second big winning opening C20, or the like, The number of balls held by the player will increase. Here, the completion of the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B” triggers the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state (a so-called probable state accompanied by the so-called electric support state). Note that, as described above, the “7B” is a jackpot design that can pay out the most game balls in the fourth embodiment, and that the prize ball of “2400 balls” is paid out at the jackpot according to the “7B”. Become.

  Here, the section from (c) to (d) includes the big hit related to the “7B” symbol in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the latent probability change state with the so-called non-electric support state). A series of flows in which game balls can be acquired. In the series of flows, a section (c), that is, a section in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit (or a section in which a prize ball excluding a big hit is obtained). )) Is “2145 balls”, while the section (d), ie, the big hit (the big hit of the first main game side and the second big game side) which has the largest number of prize balls The total average prize ball number in the section in which the prize ball is obtained by the largest prize ball number among all the jackpots with the big hit is “2400 balls”, and the “total prize ball number by the big hit> The total number of prize balls by small hits "is configured. In addition, the configuration is such that “the total number of prize balls due to the big hit> the total number of prize balls excluding the big hit”.

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the same figure, in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state (probable change state with a so-called electric support state), the player plays the game by right-handing and The game ball is fired toward the first main game start port A10-2, and the game is mainly executed on the first main game side. Further, the game can be advanced while maintaining the possessed ball by the prize ball by entering the game ball into the right first main game start port A10-2.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in the case of the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (so-called non-electric support state with latent probability change state), The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is set to a relatively short time (1 second in this example), and the game progresses by firing game balls toward the second main game start port B10 by right-handing. On the other hand, in the case of the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state (a so-called probable state accompanied by the electric support state), the variation time of the second main game symbol is set to be relatively long (in this example, 100%). Minutes or more), and the game is advanced by firing game balls toward the right first main game start port A10-2 by right-handing. In addition, in the case of the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called non-electric support state with latent probability change state), the small hit pertaining to the ball entering the second main game start port B10 is continuously won. As a result, the number of game balls is increased, and the gaming performance is expected to be a big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state (a so-called probable state accompanied by the so-called electric support state), the first main game starting port is provided. With the prize ball of the electric accessory A11-2d or the like, the gaming property can be expected to win the jackpot while maintaining the possession ball, and even when proceeding with the right-handed game, a plurality of gaming properties that differ depending on the gaming state are realized. You can do it.

(Modification Example 1 from Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the fourth embodiment, the variation mode determination table referred to according to the gaming state is configured to be uniform, and a certain gaming state ｛probability varying gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (so-called non-electric support state) In the variation mode determination table referred to in｝, the number of payouts is increased by shortening the interval of occurrence of small hits, but even if the gaming state is the same. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the change mode determination table to be referred to may be different, and in that case, it is possible to create a further variation in gameplay. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modified example from the fourth embodiment, and only differences from the fourth embodiment will be described below in detail. Further, since the first modification from the fourth embodiment is also a modification based on the fourth embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the fourth embodiment is the first modification from the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that it is applicable.

  First, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 48 in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment. Steps 1458 (fourth variation 1) to step 1462 (fourth variation 1), step 1850 (fourth variation 1), step 1464 (fourth variation 1), and step 1466 (fourth variation) are different from the fourth embodiment. The purpose is to change the referenced variation mode determination table when a predetermined condition is satisfied even if the game state is the same, even if the game state is the same. That is, in step 1458 (fourth variation 1), the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether the limited frequency flag is on. (The referenced variation mode determination table is made different depending on the on / off state of the limited frequency flag, but the on / off switching of the flag can be performed in the same game state). In the case of Yes in step 1458 (fourth variation 1), in step 1460 (fourth variation 1), the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to the game state is referred to (especially, the main game table 3 is referred to), and the main game is performed. The change mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the symbol win / fail lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the variation mode lottery random number), and these are determined by the first and second mains. The game symbol information is temporarily stored in the game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1412. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1458 (fourth variation 1), at step 1462 (fourth variation 1), the limited frequency control means MP53 sets the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game). With reference to the fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B (particularly, referring to the limited frequency table), the main game symbol winning / rejecting lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the variation mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1412.

  After the first (second) variable flag is turned off in step 1454 (second variation 1), in step 1850 (fourth variation 1), the limited frequency control unit MP53 executes the limited frequency transition described later. The determination process is performed, and the process proceeds to Step 1430.

  After turning on the condition device operation flag in step 1432, in step 1464 (fourth variation), the limited frequency control means MP53 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c to zero. Next, in step 1466 (fourth variation 1), the limited frequency control means MP53 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The process moves to 1500.

  As described above, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the information related to the limited frequency (the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c, the limited frequency flag status) is cleared. However, as will be described later, when the cumulative number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined number, starting after the special game is executed as a big hit, the predetermined number Even if the game state before and after the arrival is the same, the referenced change mode determination table will be different (the limited frequency flag is switched on / off according to the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a table configuration diagram used in a main game symbol display process in Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is that a limited frequency table is provided. The characteristic configuration of the table is that the average value of the fluctuation time selected at the time of the loss or small hit on the second main game side is the probability Although it is longer than the average value of the fluctuation time selected in the table referred to in the floating game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called non-electric support state with latent probability change state), the probability fluctuation game state and the non- It is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time selected in the table referred to in the game state other than the time reduction game state (in particular, the normal game state = non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state). . With this configuration, when the limited frequency flag is on, small hits occur at longer intervals than in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortened game state (so-called latent probability change state with non-electric support state). However, since a small hit occurs periodically, the ball held by the player is compensated for by a ball coming out of the small hit to a form close to the current status (or slightly reduced). In addition, as a second main game big hit symbol, a short open big hit symbol (a big hit symbol in which the first big winning opening C10 is short open in the distribution game execution round, 4B in this example) is provided. However, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, since the probability fluctuation game state is configured to continue until the next big hit occurrence, the role of shifting from the probability fluctuation game state to the non-probability fluctuation game state. It fulfills.

  Note that, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, the average value of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is “the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (the so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state). Average value ≦ Limited frequency time (Limited frequency flag is ON and limited frequency table is referred to) Average value ≦ Probability fluctuating gaming state and gaming state other than time reduction gaming state (especially, normal gaming state = non-probability) (Variable game state and non-time shortened game state). " Further, the above configuration is satisfied even if only the loss is performed.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the limited frequency shift determination process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (fourth variation 1) in FIG. 58 in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment. First, at step 1852, the limited frequency control means MP53 adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c. Next, in step 1854, the limited frequency control unit MP53 refers to the limited frequency counter MP53c, and determines whether the counter value has reached a predetermined value (500 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1854, in step 1856, the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines that the current game state is a probability-variable game state and a non-time shortened game state (so-called non-electronic support It is determined whether the state is a latent probability change state accompanied by a state. In the case of Yes in step 1856, in step 1858, the limited frequency control means MP53 turns on the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and performs the next processing The process proceeds to (Step 1430). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1854 or 1856, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1430).

  As described above, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, when the number of symbol changes from the end of the special game (stop of the big hit symbol related to the special game) reaches a predetermined number (500 times in this example), It is configured to shift to a limited frequency state (a state that does not affect the level of the winning probability of the main game symbol or the presence or absence of the electric support state, but only affects the symbol change time of the main game symbol), With such a configuration, when the number of possessed balls is reduced due to the inability to win a big hit for the predetermined number of times, the time interval for winning the small hit on the second main game side can be shortened. As a result, the ratio of the total number of prize balls excluding special games to the launched game balls (so-called base) is increased, and the user can wait for the next jackpot winning while suppressing the speed of reducing the game balls. It can be a friendly gaming machine. In addition, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, as shown in the processing of step 1856, in the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the latent probability changing state with the so-called non-electric support state), Although it is configured not to shift to the limited frequency state, the configuration is such that the fluctuation time of the second main game side in the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state (so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state) is set. The average value is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the limited frequency state, that is, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (the so-called latent probability change state with the non-electric support state) are the limited frequency state. Since the base is higher than that of the game, it does not cause a disadvantageous situation for the player. In addition, it is preferable that the base in the limited frequency state does not exceed 1, that is, it is preferable that the base is not deviated from the intent of waiting for the next big hit winning while suppressing the speed of reducing the game balls. (It is desirable not to have a configuration in which the number of game balls increases even if a big hit is not won).

  Further, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, when the number of symbol changes from the end of the special game (stop of the big hit symbol related to the special game) reaches a predetermined number (500 in this example), the limited frequency is set. Although the transition is made to the state, the contents of the transition mode to the limited frequency state and the variation mode determination table of the second main game side in the limited frequency state are not limited to this. For example, (1) the first main game side The ratio of the big hit symbols on the first main game side, in which the first big winning opening C10 (the big winning holes related to the sorting game) is long open to the entire big hit symbols of the second main game, is 40%, The ratio of the big hit symbols on the second main game side, in which the first big winning opening C10 (the big winning holes related to the sorting game) is long open to the entire big hit symbols on the gaming side, is 70%. After the end of the game (big hits pertaining to special games Based on the number of symbol changes from the stop), the limited frequency state is configured in a state where the number of symbol changes is “100 to 199”, “300 to 399”, or “500 to 599”. In the situation where the fluctuation efficiency is increased (the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the frequency is not limited), if the big hit occurs on the second main game side, the probability fluctuation game state is entered after the end of the big hit The possibility of shifting is higher than the case of a big hit on the first main game side, that is, by configuring the big hit in a limited frequency state to be advantageous for the player, after the special game is over (special A so-called chance zone is provided in the number of symbol changes from the stop of the big hit symbol related to the game). (2) The configuration of the chance zone is combined with the configuration of the first modification from the fourth embodiment. 3) Koatari pattern of the first main game side shifts to limit the frequency state to stop may be configured like.

  Further, the effect mode to be executed may be made different depending on whether or not the state is the limited frequency state. Also, in the limited frequency state, the effect mode may be made different based on the number of symbol changes in the limited frequency state. For example, when the stay period in the limited frequency state is 100 symbol changes, the first half of the limited frequency state may be changed by 50 times. The effect mode may be different between the 50 times and the latter 50 times. In addition, it is configured to execute a dedicated effect (for example, an effect for inciting a player such as “last chance!”) At the first symbol change that has shifted to the limited frequency state or the last symbol change at which the limited frequency state ends. In addition, for one symbol change, the selection ratio of a specific change time (for example, about 10 seconds) may be the highest.

  In addition, the configuration for shifting to the limited frequency state may be only the first main game side (only the first main game side variation mode determination table). The first main game side may be configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state while not shifting to the limited frequency state irrespective of the first main game side. Can be shifted to the limited frequency state (the table referred to when the change mode is determined can be switched from the first main game change mode determination table to the limited frequency table), and the limited frequency state is the number of times the main game symbol has changed. A transition is made from the limited frequency state A to the limited frequency state B according to the progress (the table referred to when determining the variation mode is switched from the limited frequency table A to the limited frequency table B). There. Further, the selection candidates of the change time of the limited frequency table A and the limited frequency table B may be configured to be dependent on the number of reservations at the start of the change. For example, when the number of reservations is 0 to 1, the selection is made. The average value of the fluctuation time is “15 seconds” in the limited frequency table A and “6 seconds” in the limited frequency table B. On the other hand, the average value of the fluctuation time selected when the number of holdings is two or three is The limited frequency table A may be set to “7 seconds”, and the limited frequency table B may be set to “5 seconds”. That is, in the limited frequency table A, the difference between the average value of the fluctuation time selected when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time selected when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 (8 seconds ), The difference (1) between the average value of the fluctuation time selected when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time selected when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 in the limited frequency table B. (Seconds) may be shorter. Further, in the limited frequency table B, the difference in the average value of the fluctuation time is 0, for example, the fluctuation time is determined with reference to one type of table (selection candidate) that does not depend on the number of holds regardless of the game state. It may be configured to be seconds. Further, it is desirable that the limited frequency table A be configured such that the selection candidates (tables to be referred) of the variable time are different depending on the number of suspensions.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (Fourth Variation 1) of FIG. 15 in Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1799-7 (fourth variation 1) and step 1799-8 (fourth variation 1), that is, the specific game in step 1799-7 (fourth variation 1) The control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the stop symbol is a big hit symbol in which a time saving big hit symbol (a non-probability changing game state and a time shortening game state after the end of the special game, 4A in this example) , 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1799-7 (fourth variation 1), in step 1799-8 (fourth variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c to a predetermined number (in this example, 100 Is set, and the flow shifts to step 1799-9. If the answer is No in step 1799-7 (fourth modification 1), the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 62 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is step 2700 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2700 (fourth variation 1), the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. The process moves to 2050 (fourth).

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (fourth variation one) of FIG. 62 in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2702, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the limited frequency state is currently in effect (whether or not the limited frequency flag is ON on the main side). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "forest stage" as the staying stage, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2050 (fourth)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2702, in step 2706, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is currently in the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “empty stage” as the staying stage, and proceeds to the next processing {the processing in step 2050 (fourth)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2706, in step 2710, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is currently in the probability fluctuation game state. If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712 the background effect display control means SM23 sets "space stage" as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process {the process in step 2050 (fourth)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2710, in other words, if the current game state is the normal game state, in step 2714, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "desert stage" as the staying stage, and performs the next processing # The process moves to step (4) (step 2050).

  As described above, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, the staying stages can be different depending on the game state, the presence or absence of the limited frequency, and the like. The tendency and the total number of effects are different (for example, in the “forest stage”, notice effects A, B, and C occur, and the total number of effects is 100. On the other hand, in the “empty stage”, notice effects B, C , D occur, and the total number of effects is 80).

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the right-handing instruction display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2050 (Variation 4) in FIG. 62 in Modification Example 1 from the fourth embodiment. The difference from the fourth embodiment is step 2072 (fourth modification 1), that is, the right-handed instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and is currently in the limited frequency state. Is not determined (whether the limited frequency flag is turned off on the main side). In the case of Yes in step 2072 (fourth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2066, and in the case of No, that is, in the case of the limited frequency state, in step 2064, the second right-hand instruction display is displayed. Become. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the first right-handed instruction display is displayed even during the limited frequency state, but the display mode of the right-handed instruction display during the limited frequency state is as follows. The second right-handing instruction display may be different from the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction table. In addition, in the case of Yes in step 2058, that is, in the case of the time-reduced gaming state and the limited frequency state, the second right-handing instruction display may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 65 is an image diagram illustrating a transition of the number of game balls in a first modification example from the fourth embodiment. First, as shown in the section (a) of the same figure, the special game that has been won in the normal game state is executed, and the game proceeds with right-handed. In addition, during the special game related to the big hit symbol “4A”, a prize ball is paid out by entering the second big winning opening C20 or the like, so that the player's possession ball increases. Since the big hit symbol related to the special game is “4A”, the game shifts to the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state after the end of the special game.

  Next, as shown in the section (b) of the same figure, in the non-probability changing game state and the time shortening game state, the game proceeds right-handed, and the game ball enters the second special winning opening C20. The prize ball based on the ball allows the player's possessed ball to proceed with the game while maintaining the status quo. Thereafter, the normal game state is set when the symbol change for the number of time reductions (100 times in this example) is completed.

  Next, as shown in a section (c) of the same figure, in the normal game state, the game proceeds by left-handing, and the count value of the limited frequency counter MP53c is increased to a predetermined value without winning a big hit (in this example, 500), that is, when the symbol change is executed 500 times since the end of the previous big hit (big hit related to 4A), the state shifts to the limited frequency state (the limited frequency flag is turned on). Becomes).

  Next, as shown in the section of FIG. 3D, when the state shifts to the limited frequency state, a right-handed instruction display (in this example, a second right-handed instruction display) is displayed, and thereafter, the game is played by right-handed. It will progress. During the limited frequency state, the fluctuation time of the second special winning opening C20 is shorter than when the limited frequency is not during the limited frequency (except in the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state). Small hits are won continuously at short intervals, the rate of decrease of the game balls becomes slow, and the game can be advanced without reducing the number of possessed balls as much as possible. As described above, during the limited frequency state, “the total number of game balls to be paid out (excluding big hits, prize balls due to small hits, prize balls due to prize balls at entrances, etc.) <The total number of game balls fired (games) Game ball fired by the player) ".

  Next, as shown in the section (e) of the same figure, during the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B”, the game proceeds by right-handing, and the ball enters the second big winning opening C20, and the like. Is paid out, the ball possessed by the player increases. Here, the completion of the special game relating to the big hit symbol “7B” triggers the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. In addition, as described above, the “7B” is a jackpot design that can pay out the most game balls in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, and the prize ball of “2400 balls” at the jackpot according to the “7B” Will be paid out.

  Next, as shown in the section (f) of the same figure, in the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state, the game proceeds right-handed and the game ball enters the second big winning opening C20. , The ball held by the player can proceed with the game while maintaining the current status. In addition, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state do not end with the number of symbol fluctuations but continue until the next big hit is won.

  With the above configuration, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, the limited frequency state is determined by the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game (stop of the big hit symbol related to the special game). In this configuration, the change mode determination table referred to by factors other than the jackpot can be changed, and the efficiency of entering the second main game start port B10 can be increased in the limited frequency state. By configuring so that the decrease of the possessed ball can be suppressed by successive small hits winning, novel game characteristics that can rescue a player who cannot win a big hit can be created.

  In the fourth embodiment and the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, the limited frequency state can be shifted by the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game (stop of the big hit symbol related to the special game). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of times of change of the main game symbol from a predetermined symbol change such as a small hit or a specific loss symbol reaches a predetermined number, it may be configured to shift to a limited frequency state. The measurement of the predetermined number may be the total number of the number of times of change of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol, or may be any one of the number of times of change.

  In the fourth embodiment and the first modified example from the fourth embodiment, the first special winning opening C10 is configured to have the specific area C22 (the first special winning opening C10 is a large game related to the sorting game execution round). However, the specific area C22 may be provided in the second winning port C20. Further, in the fourth embodiment and the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, as the auxiliary game side game state, the auxiliary game time reduction game state (the game state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on) and the auxiliary game non-time Although the reduced game state (a game state in which the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is provided, only one type of game state on the auxiliary game side may be provided (the auxiliary game time reduction game state may not be provided).

  The board configuration of the fourth embodiment and the first modification example from the fourth embodiment may be changed. For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 and the right first main game start port A10-2 are connected to the rectifying passage D50. (The auxiliary game starting port H10 is disposed on the upper side as viewed from the player), and almost all of the game balls flowing down the straightening passage D50 and passing through the auxiliary game starting port H10 are You may comprise so that a ball may enter the right 1st main game starting port A10-2. In the case of such a configuration, in the time-reduced game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 to when it enters the right first main game start port A10-2, "auxiliary Since it is desirable that the change of the game symbol can be started → the change of the auxiliary game symbol is completed → the opening of the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d ”, the change time of the auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the opening mode of the main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d is “open for 6 seconds → closed”. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, in order to prevent a large amount of game balls from entering the right first main game start port A10-2 when performing a right strike in the time reduction game state, the right It is desirable that the number of prize balls of the first main game start port A10-2 be one ball.

  In the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the fourth embodiment, an electric accessory (in this example, a first main game starting port electric accessory A11-2d) is provided at the starting port on the first main game side. The two main opening ports on the first main game side are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that two may be provided.

  The fourth embodiment and the first modification example from the fourth embodiment may be configured as follows. (1) The number of counts (the large winning opening is determined by the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20). The number of balls that are closed and the running round ends may be different. In this case, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from being acquired in one small hitting game, the count number of the second big winning port C20 may be configured to be smaller than the count number of the first big winning port C10 ( For example, the number of counts of the first special winning opening C10: 10 balls, the number of counts of the second special winning opening C20: 3 balls), (2) the number of prize balls in the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20. The first special winning opening C10, in which the transition of the gaming state (transition to the probability varying gaming state) is an important role in the progress of the game, may be changed depending on the configuration of the game. In some cases, it is only necessary to fulfill the role of shifting, so that the number of prize balls may be reduced (than the second big winning opening C20). In the case of such a configuration, the count number of the first special winning opening C10 may be smaller than that of the second special winning opening C20. In order to allow a game ball to enter the C22, it is preferable that the count number of the first winning port C10 is not reduced (than the second winning port C20). (3) The first winning port C10 is opened. A small hit symbol to be played and a small hit symbol to be opened by the second big winning opening C20 may be provided. When the player wants to win a prize ball, the second big winning opening C20 is opened and the prize is given to the player. If the player does not want to acquire the ball, the small hit symbol may be distributed so that the first big winning port C10 is opened (for example, the first big winning port C10 is opened in the small hit on the first main game side, In the small hit on the second main game side, the second big winning opening C20 is opened. , Etc.).

  In addition, in the first modification example from the fourth embodiment, it is configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state, but in such a case, the type of the limited frequency table that can be selected on the second main game side. (Or a pattern of the limited frequency state that can be changed) is one type (for example, “main game table 3 → limited frequency table A → main game table 3”, etc.), and a limit that can be selected on the first main game side. The number of types of the frequency table (or the pattern of the limited frequency state that can be changed) may be a plurality of types (for example, “main game table 3 → limited frequency table A → limited frequency table B → main game table 3”). It is suitable.

(Modification Example 2 from Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the variation mode determination table referred to in a certain gaming state {probability varying gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state (so-called latent probability varying state with non-electric support state)} in the fourth embodiment, a small hit occurs. The configuration in which the number of payouts is increased by setting the interval to be short can be applied to a gaming machine having a configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described below in detail. Further, since the second modification from the fourth embodiment is a modification based on the fourth embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the fourth embodiment is the second modification from the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that it is applicable.

  First, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fourth) in FIG. 15 in the second modification example from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 1799-11 (fourth variation 2) to step 1799-14 (fourth variation 2), that is, the specific game in step 1799-11 (fourth variation 2) The control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the special game which has been won in the current normal game state has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1799-11 (fourth variation 2), the process proceeds to step 1799-1, and in the case of No, in step 1799-12 (fourth variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 Medium counter MP54c (a counter for counting the number of times a special game has been won consecutively in a high profit situation. In this example, in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state, a game state other than 1) is added to the counter value of (the number of times the special game is continuously won). Next, in step 1799-13 (fourth variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the extended game counter MP54c, and the counter value is determined as the extended game end value (non-probability variable game state and non-time shortened game). When the number of consecutive winnings in the special game in a game state other than the state reaches the end value of the extended game, the game shifts to the non-probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of special games that are continuously executed with high profits including the initial hit is six times. If Yes in step 1799-13 (fourth variation 2), in step 1799-14 (fourth variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the extended game counter MP54c to zero, and performs the next process ( The processing shifts to step 1800). If the answer is No in Step 1799-13 (fourth modification 2), the flow shifts to Step 1799-1.

  With the configuration described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the fourth embodiment, the parallel lottery is configured to be executable, and the normal gaming state (the non-probability-variable gaming state and the non-time shortening game) By setting an upper limit on the number of special games that can be consecutively won in game states other than (state), the ball management is performed not only in one game state but also in a plurality of game states that are highly profitable for the player And the number of payouts can be prevented from being excessively increased, thereby providing a user-friendly gaming machine.

  Note that a configuration in which an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive wins of a special game across a plurality of game states that are highly profitable for the player, as in Modification Example 2 from the fourth embodiment, is described in the fourth embodiment. The present invention is not limited, and there is no problem in applying the present invention to any of the embodiments.

  In addition, in the case where the upper limit is set for the number of special games that can be consecutively won in the game state where the player has a high profit (the so-called limiter configuration), the payout in the high profit state is managed. In order to calculate the total number of acquired game balls, the following calculation may be performed. In the low profit game state, the player wins the "special game A" (initial hit), shifts to the high profit game state after the "special game A" ends, and in the high profit game state, "special game B → special game C" ), And the game shifts to a low-profit game state after the end of “special game C”, (1) the payout from the end of “special game A” to the end of “special game C” ( (2) The number of balls from the start of “special game A” to the end of “special game C” is defined as the total number of game balls (including the initial hit). , Etc.

(Fifth embodiment)
The first main game symbol and the second main game symbol as in the fourth embodiment can be simultaneously changed (so-called parallel lottery type gaming machines), and have a different configuration from the above-described embodiment, and have a different interest. A high gaming machine can be created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the fifth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, it is also supplemented that any of the above-described configurations can be applied to the fifth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 67 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below. First, two first main game start ports are provided, and the first main game start port (1) A10-1 is provided with a first main game start port ball detection device (1) A11-1s. The first main game start port (2) A10-2 includes a first main game start port entrance detection device (2) A11-2s, and the second main game start port B10 detects a second main game start port entrance detection. Device B11s is provided. Here, the first main game starting port entrance ball detection device (1) A11-1s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting port (1) A10-1, and the first main game The starting opening ball detection device (2) A11-2s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first main game starting opening (2) A10-2. The main game start port ball entry information is generated. The second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second main game start opening B10. Generate sphere information.

  Further, the first main game start port (2) A10-2 is constantly displaced between an open state where it is easy to enter the first main game start port (2) A10-2 and a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball. The entry of game balls is restricted by the first main game start-port entry control member A11f (for example, irregularly displaced).

  The “specific game” in the fifth embodiment is, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability to a special game is higher than that in a normal game, or a fluctuation time of a main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. It refers to a time-reduced game or an auxiliary game advantageous state in which the opening time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a main flowchart showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the small hit game control process of step 1800 is not provided.

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 68 of the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage unit MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H, and the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol is It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to change the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). At the same time, by referring to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag Is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off, and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of an auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbols are “D0, D1”, and the stop symbol that becomes the winning symbol is “D1”. The opening mode of the electric accessory, which is opened due to the stop of the hit symbol, is in the assisting game disadvantageous state (when the auxiliary game flag is off), the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed). In the auxiliary game advantageous state (when the auxiliary game flag is on), the opening mode is (open for 4 seconds → closed). In addition, when the auxiliary game is in the advantageous state (when the auxiliary game flag is ON), the stop symbol is configured to easily hit the symbol "D1".

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-H sends the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H to the auxiliary game symbol based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding unit MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol with reference to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and acquires the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is definitely displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a "hit symbol" (D1 in this example). I do. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens based on the game state (for example, in the case of a time reduction game, the open mode is opened for 4 seconds). Then, a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric accessory is set in the second main game starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d, and proceeds to step 1242.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B and outputs the second main game start port electric accessory It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) related to the opening time of the accessory B11d has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily sets the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage unit MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If the answer is No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242; if the answer is No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224; Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1300).

  In the present flowchart, for convenience, the process immediately proceeds to the next step after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but is not limited thereto. In such a case, the process may be shifted to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by performing a branch process using a fixed stop display flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) in FIG. First, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1401, the game content determination means MN refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether any of the condition device operation flag and the special game execution flag is on. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1402, the game content determination means MN temporarily stops the first game timer (second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-B), and performs the next process (process in step 1600). Move to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1403, the game content determination means MN makes the temporarily stopped first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-A (second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-B). ) Is restarted. At the execution timing of this processing, the main game timer (the first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-A, the second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-B) is temporarily stopped in step 1402. If not, the process proceeds to the next step without executing this process. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the second main game side can start even when the fluctuation of the first main game side occurs, and the fluctuation of the first main game side also occurs when the fluctuation of the second main game side occurs. Can be started (so-called parallel lottery). In addition, when a special game related to the other main game symbol is started while the one main game symbol is changing (the condition device operation flag or the special game execution flag is turned on), the change of one main game symbol ｛or The main game timer (the first main game symbol change management timer MP11t-A, the second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-B) is configured to temporarily stop until the end of the special game. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.For example, when a special game related to the other main game symbol is started while one main game symbol is changing, one main game symbol is displayed. It may be configured to be able to forcibly stop at a lost symbol. Further, at the time when the other main game symbol starts the big hit fluctuation, the one main game symbol may be forcibly stopped with the lost symbol or the subtraction of the fluctuation time may be temporarily stopped. In addition, when one of the main game symbols is started to change while the other main game symbol is executing the jackpot change, the one lottery result may be lost (so-called no lottery state). With the above-described method, it is possible to prevent one special game (or big hit) from overlapping with the other special game (or big hit), but the first main game side and the second main game side In addition, the aspect of the duplication prevention may be configured to be different (for example, on the first main game side, the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol at the time of the start of the big hit variation of the first main game symbol, and While the fluctuation of the second main game side which starts during the time is a non-lottery state, the second main game side forcibly stops the first main game symbol with a lost symbol at the time of starting the special game of the second main game side, For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the duplication prevention modes can be executed in combination.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation of the second main game side can start even when the fluctuation of the first main game side occurs, and the first main game also changes when the fluctuation of the second main game side occurs. It is configured so that the fluctuation of the side can be started (so-called parallel lottery), but is not limited to this. If there is a reserved digestion based on the winning order or a reserved ball of the second main game symbol exists, Regardless of the existence of the reserved ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the reservation of the first main game symbol first), the second main game symbol may be executed by giving priority to the reserved digestion. Good.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (the second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1404, the reserve digestion control means MJ31 determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not a special game (or a condition device is operating), the first (second) main game symbol is not changing (the other main game side may be changing), and The condition is that a game symbol is held. Although not shown in the present example, when a fixed variation time (time for stopping and displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is confirmed) is provided, the variation start condition of the next variation is provided during the fixed variation time. May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1404, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digestion control unit MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol change is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the temporarily stored remaining information is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, Based on one main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, a winning random determination random number), a main game symbol success / failure lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 72 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-B) in the fifth embodiment. As shown in this example, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability changing gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability changing gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) sets the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is determined based on the main game symbol success / failure lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, the symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 72 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the fifth embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game symbol is selected from a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A / 5A” and “5B”). Is determined as a big hit symbol. Note that the number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is all 2R. In addition, the type of the random number value and the stop symbol is also an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the loss symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. When a specific symbol (for example, a specific losing symbol) is stopped and displayed, before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol are changed. It may be configured to shift to a different state (limited frequency state) (such a configuration will be described later).

  In addition, a special game execution round may be provided in which the special winning opening is opened only for a very short time (for example, 52 ms). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to acquire a payout in the opening in a very short time, and therefore, on the effect display device SG, “From the actual number of rounds of the special game, The number of rounds in which the opening in a very short time is subtracted is subtracted from the number of rounds ". Displaying images of balls for the number of easy rounds, and producing an effect in which the display mode of the image of the balls changes (or disappears) each time the round easy to acquire a ball starts (or ends). It may be configured to execute. The present invention is not limited to this, and the number of rounds already executed during the special game and in which a payout can be easily obtained may be displayed on the effect display device SG. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize how many rounds in which a payout can be substantially obtained have been executed. In addition, during the special game, the notification of the round in which it is easy to obtain the expected payout and the notification of the round in which the executed payout is easy to obtain are not required to be performed in all special games. It may be configured to be executed only during the special game at the time of (the big hit won in the non-probability changing game state and the time reduction game state), or the special game related to the first main game side and the second main game side. The execution or non-execution may be made different from the special game.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-A (second main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-B) selects the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, The fluctuation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1412.

  Here, FIG. 72 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the present example, in the fifth embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the winning / losing result of the main game symbol, the winning symbol, the main game time reduction flag state, and the variation mode determination random number. It is configured to be determined. In addition, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation during the auxiliary game disadvantage state (particularly, the fluctuation of the first main game side) is determined from the same selection candidate regardless of the long open big hit and the short open big hit, while the auxiliary game The change time of the jackpot change during the advantageous state (particularly, the change on the first main game side) is configured to be determined from different selection candidates based on whether it is a long open jackpot or a short open jackpot. (Note that, even during the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, for example, in the variation related to the short opening big hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short compared to the variation related to the long opening big hit is easily selected. The gap between the effect to be executed and the game can be reduced). In this example, when the main game time reduction flag is off (auxiliary game disadvantageous state), the average value of the fluctuation time on the second main game side is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time on the first main game side. In addition, during the auxiliary game disadvantageous state, the number of variation mode candidates on the first main game side (in this example, 4 patterns at the time of big hit and 10 patterns at the time of loss) on the first main game side regarding the selection options of the variation mode are the second main game side. (In this example, one pattern at the time of a big hit and one pattern at the time of a loss). That is, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of change mode candidates in the case of the long open jackpot is larger on the first main game side than on the second main game side. On the other hand, also when the main game time reduction flag is on (auxiliary game advantageous state), the average value of the fluctuation time on the second main game side is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time on the first main game side. In addition, during the auxiliary game advantageous state, the number of variation mode candidates on the first main game side (in this example, 3 patterns at the time of big hit, 7 patterns at the time of loss) on the first main game side regarding the selection options of the variation mode are the second main game side. (In this example, one pattern at the time of a big hit and one pattern at the time of a loss). In addition, the number of variation mode candidates on the first main game side relating to the auxiliary game advantage state (in this example, three patterns of big hits and 7 patterns of loss) is determined by the number of variation mode candidates on the first main game side relating to the auxiliary game disadvantageous state ( In this example, the number of hits is less than 4 (big hits, 10 hits). In addition, the average value of the fluctuation time of the big hit (especially at the time of a long open big hit) in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game is longer than the average value of the fluctuation time of the big hit (especially at the time of the long open big hit) in the auxiliary game advantageous state. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, during the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, regarding the selection candidates of the variation mode (effect), the number of variation mode candidates on the first main game side (in this example, 4 patterns at the time of big hit and 10 patterns at the time of loss) is the second. It is larger than the number of variation mode candidates on the main game side (in this example, one pattern at the time of big hit and one pattern at the time of loss). That is, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of change mode candidates in the case of the long open jackpot is larger on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, even during the auxiliary game advantageous state, the number of change mode candidates on the first main game side (in this example, 3 patterns at the time of big hit, 7 patterns at the time of loss) for the selection candidates of the change mode (effect) are: It is larger than the number of variation mode candidates on the second main game side (in this example, one pattern at the time of big hit and one pattern at the time of loss). That is, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of change mode candidates in the case of the long open jackpot is larger on the first main game side (2 patterns) than on the second main game side (1 pattern).

  Further, among the variation modes (variation time of 30 to 500 seconds in this example) that can be selected on the first main game side during the auxiliary game advantageous state, the variation mode (A50t in this example) selected at the time of the short opening big hit (The fluctuation time is 50 seconds) is a relatively short time.

  Next, in step 1412, the game content determining means MN executes a command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) relating to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. (Variation mode information, etc.) and a command relating to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) are set in a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (control command transmission processing in step 1999). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1414, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol change management timer MP11t-A (second main game It is set to the symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-B) and the timer is started. Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display portion A21g (first main game symbol display portion A21 of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the first (second) main game symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. . Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first (second) fluctuation in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The middle flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1422.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1404, at step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, It is determined whether the 1 (second) changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1420, the process proceeds to step 1422, and if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1422, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the first (second) main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1422, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol of the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20). The change display of the main game symbol on the display unit A21g (the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is determined. Display control is performed as a stop symbol, and the flow proceeds to step 1426. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1422, the processing shifts to step 1426. Next, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C transmits information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol change is finished to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first (second) fluctuation in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. Turn off the medium flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C to determine whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that also in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 71. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time-saving counter MP52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b in steps 1510 and 1512. Next, in step 1514 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 is a command related to the information that the counter value of the normal game shift command / the time-saving counter MP52c has become 0, and a high profit state flag (described later). A command｝ for turning off the flag managed by the sub-side is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit (in the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM Side) and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that also in the case of No in step 1502, 1504, or 1508, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 68. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the end demonstration flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transfer permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1704, in steps 1706 and 1708, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game shift permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on. Next, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM), and the process proceeds to step 1716 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1704, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes at step 1714, the process moves to step 1716. In the case of No at step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been granted, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1716, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the current round is a distribution game execution round (a round related to the opening of the second special winning opening C20, in this example, a second R). Is determined. If Yes in step 1716, in step 1800 (fifth), the distribution game execution control unit MP36 executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1742. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1716, at Step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, It is determined whether or not it is immediately before the start of each round. In the case of Yes in step 1718, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1720, the special game execution means MP33 stores the first special winning opening C10 in the special game in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. An open pattern (for example, an open pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes) is set. Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 opens the first special winning opening C10 by driving the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d (hereinafter, the opening set in the special game related information temporary storing means MB20b). Opening / closing is performed based on the pattern), a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an open time timer), and the process is started. On the other hand, if No in step 1718, that is, if the first special winning opening C10 is being opened, the flow shifts to step 1728 without performing the processing in steps 1720 to 1726.

  Next, in step 1728, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game status command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) relating to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the prize ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of prize balls has been present in the first winning port C10 in the round. judge. If Yes in step 1730, the process moves to step 1734. On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1730, at Step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially, the opening time timer) and sets a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1732, the process moves to step 1734. If the determination in Step 1732 is No, the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 1997).

  Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 stops driving the first special winning opening electric auditors product C11d and closes the first special winning opening C10. Next, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, in step 1738, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1740, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to a counter value of a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b.

  Next, in step 1742, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the last round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). (Not shown) (whether or not the counter value exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes at Step 1742, at Step 1744, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a command for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999).

  Next, in step 1746, the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game relating to a big hit (so-called first hit) in the non-time shortening game state. If Yes in step 1746, in step 1748, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b flag area and determines whether or not the probable change transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1748, in step 1750, the special game execution means MP33 sets the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 to the game explanation time (the explanation of the game to the player in the probability varying game state started after the end of the special game). (In this example, 30 seconds), the timer is started, and the flow proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, if No in step 1748, in step 1752, the special game execution means MP33 sends the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 a special game end display time (a time for notifying the player that the special game is ended). Yes, in this example, 5 seconds) is set, the timer is started, and the flow shifts to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1746, in step 1754, the special game execution means MP33 sets the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 to an end standby time (a time for waiting for the end of the special game. Second), start the timer, and proceed to step 1756. In this example, the special game end demonstration time is configured to be different only at the time of the first hit, based on the on / off state of the main game certain change transition reservation flag (the presence or absence of a game ball entering the specific area C22). The present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the special game end demonstration time related to the big hit in the time shortened game state (other than the first hit), the main game probable change transition reservation flag is turned on / off (the game ball is moved to the specific area C22). The configuration may be such that the special game end demonstration time is different based on the presence or absence of a ball (the effect on the sub side is also different based on that).

  In this way, at the end of the special game in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game (especially, the special game scheduled to shift to the state of the auxiliary game advantage), the explanation of the game in the state of the auxiliary game advantage is executed. It is a long special game end demonstration time. On the other hand, at the end of the special game in the auxiliary game advantageous state, there is no need to execute the game explanation, so the relatively short special game end demonstration time. In particular, during the auxiliary game advantageous state, since the execution of more fluctuations on the second main game side leads to the player's profit, the special game end demonstration time (particularly, the second main game It is preferable to shorten the special game end demonstration time on the side).

  Next, in step 1756, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the end demonstration flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1758. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1702, the processing shifts to step 1758.

  Next, in step 1758, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1750 (fifth), the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1997). It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 1742, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 (fifth) in FIG. 74 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1802, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MB40b and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, that is, if the distribution game is being executed, the process proceeds to step 1818 and subsequent steps relating to the end determination of the distribution game.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1802, in Step 1804, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stop symbol which triggered the special game is the second big prize. It is determined whether it is a predetermined big hit symbol (5A, 5B in this example) that opens the mouth C20 for a long time. In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 sets the long opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 (for example, opening for 30 seconds, and (Easy entry of a game ball) is set, and the flow shifts to step 1806. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1804, in Step 1808, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 determines that the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 has a short opening pattern (for example, the opening is for 0.1 second, and It is difficult to enter a game ball into the area C22), and the flow shifts to step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears (clears to zero) the value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1812, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MB40b. Next, in step 1814, the distribution game execution control means MP36 sets the distribution game execution command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (the control command transmission process in step 1930). Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1816, the distribution game execution control means MP36 starts opening the second big winning opening C20 according to the opening pattern set in the above-described processing, and proceeds to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a new game ball in the special game being executed has entered the specific area C22 with reference to the specific area entry detection device C22s. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1818, in step 1820, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 sets the main game probable change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage unit MB30b to the main game probable change transition reservation flag. When the flag is turned on (that is, when a ball entering the specific area C22 is detected during the sorting game), the flag な る that shifts to the probability varying game state after the end of the special game is turned on. . Next, in step 1822, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 sends a command related to a specific area entering effect (an effect of notifying a player that a game ball has entered the specific area C22) to the sub main control unit. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1824. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1818, the processing shifts to step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gaming balls has won the second large winning opening C20. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes at step 1824, at step 1828, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big winning opening C20. On the other hand, if No in Step 1824, in Step 1826, the distribution game execution control unit MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. In the case of Yes at step 1826, the process proceeds to step 1828, and the second special winning opening C20 is closed. Next, in step 1830, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the distribution game related information temporary storage means MB40b.

  Next, at step 1832, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (increment) (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1742). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1826, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1742).

  In the fifth embodiment, two special winning openings are provided: the first winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one winning opening is provided. A configuration may be used. In the case of such a configuration, in a round other than the distribution game execution round in the special game, even if the game ball enters the specific area C22 (if the game ball passes through the specific area entry detection device C22s). Also, it is preferable to disable the detection of the incoming ball. In addition, by providing a shielding member capable of changing the ease with which a game ball can enter the specific area C22, in a round other than the distribution game execution round, the shielding member prevents the game ball from entering the specific area C22. It is also preferred to do so. With this configuration, the same operation as that of the fifth embodiment can be realized with one large winning opening.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fifth) in FIG. First, in step 1785-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game certain change transition reservation flag is ON. In the case of Yes at Step 1785-1, at Step 1785-2, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game certainty change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1785-3, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game certain change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1785-6.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1785-1, at Step 1785-4, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and displays the currently stopped big hit symbol. Is a long open symbol (a big hit symbol in which the second large winning opening C20 is a long open symbol, in this example, 5A and 5B). In the case of Yes at Step 1785-4, at Step 1785-5, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number (in this example, 20 times) to the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to Step 1785-6. I do. As described above, if the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 while the second winning opening C20 is open for a long time (for example, an accident such as clogging of the ball may be a cause), as a remedy. , Is configured to shift to the auxiliary game advantageous state. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the first hit (at the time of the big hit in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game), while the second big winning opening C20 is open for a long time, Even when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22, the game may not be shifted to the auxiliary game advantage state.

  Next, in step 1785-6 and step 1785-7, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (The process of step 1997). Note that also in the case of No in step 1785-4, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997).

  Next, a control process executed on the sub main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 77 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Here, the process in FIG. 7A is a process on the sub main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or the like. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When receiving → initialize the sub-side RAM, when receiving various information commands → reset the performance-related information at the time of power interruption in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. Execute Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2003, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and sets the high profit state flag / normal game state (non-probability changing game state). Further, the flag which is turned on when the state shifts from the disadvantageous state to the probability-variable game state and the auxiliary game advantage state is determined. In step 2422, it is determined whether or not｝ which is on is off. In the case of Yes in step 2003, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2900.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2003, in Step 2800 (fifth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes an effect mode switching process described later. Next, in step 2600 (fifth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a high profit state effect display process described later. Next, in step 2700 (fifth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process during the high profit state described later, and proceeds to step 2900. Next, in step 2900, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and executes The repetition processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. The process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM sends a command input port ( Check the above-mentioned data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b) based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process executed immediately before the interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the layout pending information display control means SM22 receives a new suspension occurrence command (suspended information relating to the main game symbol) from the main control board M with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 adds "1" to the drawing suspension counter (in this example, a maximum of four) in the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. I do. Next, in step 2106, the circuit diagram reservation information display control means SM22, based on the reservation generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, stores the reservation information (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery or the main control The main game symbol success / failure lottery result determined in advance on the basis of the random number value on the board M side) is temporarily stored in the circuit diagram holding information temporary storage means SM22b.

  Next, in step 2108, the circuit diagram suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether the new suspension is a suspension on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2108 (fifth), in step 2150 (fifth), the pending prefetching effect execution control means SM26 executes a prefetching process described later, and proceeds to step 2120 (fifth). That is, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the hold look-ahead is executed only for the first main game hold (the hold look-ahead is not executed for the second main game hold). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2108 (fifth), the processing shifts to step 2120 (fifth).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2110, the circuit diagram holding information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the schematic storage information display control means SM22 subtracts "1" from the schematic storage counter in the schematic storage information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the design suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the suspension information relating to the symbol change from the design suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and shifts the remaining suspension information. Next, in step 2118, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM accesses the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2120 (fifth step). ). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 2110, the process proceeds to Step 2120 (fifth).

  Next, in step 2120 (fifth), the storage plan holding information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the high profit state flag is off. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2120, in step 2122 (fifth), the design suspension information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first suspension display section SG12). A hold display image (the same number as the first main game hold number) hold display images (the hold images displayed on the effect display device SG) as many as the number of the schematic hold counters related to the first main game side in the device holding information temporary storage means SM22b. ) Is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2120 (fifth), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2200). As described above, in the present example, during the high profit state, the hold display image is not displayed on the effect display device SG (on the other hand, in the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h and the second main game symbol hold display portion B21h, Display of the number of holds is always performed).

  Next, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the pre-pending read process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the pending prefetching effect execution control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and sets the high profit state flag (as described above, the flag turned on in step 2422). ) Is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the reserved look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the look-ahead stop flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the pending prefetching effect execution control means SM26 determines in advance the fluctuation time of the newly generated suspension and the result of the success or failure based on the suspension information in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. Next, in step 2158, the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 determines whether the continuation is possible or not from the new holding fluctuation time value (50 seconds or 30 seconds in this example) determined in advance in step 2156. A value obtained by subtracting the value (20 seconds in this example, which is a time for executing the continuation availability determination as to whether or not the high profit state described later ends) is added to the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t. I do. Next, in step 2162, the reserved look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 turns on the look-ahead stop flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2166. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2158, in step 2164, the reservation prefetching effect execution control means SM26 adds the new suspension variable time value determined in advance in step 2156 to the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t. It moves to 2166.

  Next, in step 2166, the reservation look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 temporarily stores the value added to the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t in step 2160 or step 2164 in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2168, the reserved look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 turns on the additional effect execution flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2120). I do. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2154, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2120).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2170, the pending look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 determines in advance the success / failure result of the newly generated suspension based on the suspension information in the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2172, the reserved look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2172, in step 2174, the pending look-ahead effect execution control means SM26 performs a hold-change effect that is won with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3). Lottery) to be executed. Next, in step 2176, the reservation prefetching effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the holding change lottery executed in step 2174 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the reservation prefetching effect execution control means SM26 determines the display mode of the new reservation to be red, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2120). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2172 or in the case of No in Step 2176, in Step 2180, the hold look-ahead effect production execution control means SM26 determines the display mode of the new hold to be white, and executes the next process (the process in Step 2120). ).

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, when the display mode of the hold is red, the hold is determined to be a hold that is a big hit, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. The display mode of the hold may also be configured to be red. In such a configuration, the display mode of the hold (red in this example) in the case of winning the hold change lottery is different from the display mode of the hold (white in the present example) in which the hold change lottery is won. It is desirable to configure so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is also high. Further, the display mode of the suspension is an example, and there is no problem even if the type is increased or the display mode is changed.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the flag in the high profit state is on, the fluctuation time and the result of the success / failure are pre-read (predetermined). On the other hand, when the flag in the high profit state is off, It is configured to pre-read (prior judgment) only the pass / fail result.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 77. First, in step 2202, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the schematic display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206 (fifth), the schematic display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b. With reference to the symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol), the information relating to the game state, and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the variation of the symbol, the stop symbol of the decoration symbol relating to the main game symbol is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, it is a zoro eye such as “7.7.7”, and when the stop symbol is a lost symbol, it is an irregular eye such as “1.3.5”. And the variation mode {for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, non-reach, and when the variation mode is a long-time variation, normal reach or super reach, etc. Information temporary storage means SM21b (and informational display related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b) temporarily stored in the.

  Here, the effect determination table on the right side of the figure is an image diagram of the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta. As shown in the figure, the effect to be executed can be determined based on the game state, the variation mode, and the stop symbol. Further, during the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of effect patterns that can be executed on the first main game side (in this example, 4 patterns at the time of big hit and 10 patterns at the time of loss) can be executed on the second main game side. The number of effect patterns is larger than the number of effect patterns (in this example, one pattern at the time of a big hit and one pattern at the time of a loss). That is, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of effect patterns in the case of a long open jackpot is larger on the first main game side than on the second main game side. In addition, even during the auxiliary game advantageous state, the number of effect patterns that can be executed on the first main game side (in this example, three patterns at the time of big hit and seven patterns at the time of loss) is executed on the second main game side. This is larger than the number of effect patterns that can be performed (in this example, one pattern at the time of a big hit, one pattern at the time of a loss). That is, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, the number of effect patterns in the case of a long open jackpot is larger on the first main game side (2 patterns) than on the second main game side (1 pattern).

  Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2202, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 77. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether a new special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. . If Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and displays the effect display device. A jackpot start display is performed on the SG (display is performed appropriately based on the type of the jackpot = that is, if the player does not want to be aware of the occurrence of a jackpot that opens and closes only the short winning opening for a short period of time, the jackpot start display Is not performed), and the routine goes to Step 2410. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (playability and big hits). It may be appropriately executed as needed based on the type or the like). Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new sorting game execution command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2412, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display a ball entry instruction effect to the second special winning opening C20 (sub-sub-control in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). (Transmitted to the section SS side) In the round relating to the sorting game, the second large winning opening C20 is opened so that the player hits the right (the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). Will be executed), and the flow proceeds to step 2416. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2412, the process moves to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been newly received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a specific area entering command has been received from the main side in the special game being executed. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 describes the game during the high profit state (in this example, the effect is for 30 seconds, and for example, during the rush mode, the second attacker (Please always keep right-handed to open and close. "Is displayed.) A command for displaying an image to be executed is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-controller SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2900).

  Here, the high profit state is started at a timing when the normal game state (non-probability-variable game state and the auxiliary game disadvantageous state) is shifted to the probability-variable game state and the auxiliary game advantageous state. The game is terminated at the timing of transition from the state to the normal game state. (If the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific area C22 during the special game in which the second special winning opening C20 is open for a long time, the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and The state shifts to the auxiliary game advantage state, and then ends at the timing when the game mode shifts to the normal game state). In this state, the player has a high profit (the high profit state flag is on).

  Next, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the high profit state flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2450 (fifth), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an initial second number determination process described later. Next, in step 2424 (fifth), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a high profit start effect (the timer of the high profit continuation timer SM24t) in which the initial value is set in the remaining time timer display on the effect display device SG. A command for executing an effect of notifying the value to the player) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control processing in step 2900), and the flow shifts to step 2428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2426, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to execute the special game end display (5 seconds display in this example) (in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and the flow shifts to step 2428.

  Next, in step 2428, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). . Note that also in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2416, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the initial seconds determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) in FIG. 81. First, in step 2452, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the first main game side has a hold. In the case of Yes in step 2452, in step 2454, the background effect display control means SM23 preliminarily determines the fluctuation time of all the holdings of the first main game side and the result of the success or failure based on the holding information in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. I do. Next, in step 2456, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not there is a hold to be a big hit in the hold of the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2456, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the total value of the fluctuation times of all the first main game suspensions in the high profit continuation timer SM24t and starts the timer. Next, in step 2460, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch stop flag in the flag area of the preliminary effect effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2424 or step 2718). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2452, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2424 or step 2718).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2456, in step 2462, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether the continuation is possible based on the total value of the fluctuation time of the hold (including the big hit hold) before the big hit hold in the first main game hold. A value obtained by subtracting the effect time value (20 seconds in this example, which is a time for executing a continuation possibility effect related to whether or not a high profit state described later ends) is set in the high profit continuation timer SM24t. Then, the timer is started. Next, in step 2464, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch stop flag in the flag area of the preliminary effect effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2424 or 2718). I do.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, the chance of the end of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the auxiliary gaming advantageous state is a special game (in this example, the second big winning opening C20 relating to the first main gaming side is opened shortly). (Special game relating to 4A), so that the probability-variable gaming state and the auxiliary gaming advantageous state are not terminated until the jackpot on the first main gaming side is won (second large winning opening). Except when the game ball is not thrown in when C20 is long open). Therefore, as in steps 2458 and 2462, the time (advantageous time) during which the big hit symbol on the first main game side is guaranteed not to stop is set in the high profit continuation timer SM24t, so that the high profit continuation timer SM24t is set. If the timer value is not 0, it is guaranteed that the time corresponding to the timer value can maintain the probability-variable gaming state and the auxiliary gaming advantageous state. If No in step 2452, that is, if there is no hold on the first main game side during the execution of the initial seconds determination processing, the value is not set in the high profit continuation timer SM24t, and the processing in step 2610 described below is performed. (The effect of loop reproduction) is executed (the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t remains 0, which is the value before the initial value is set, so the process of step 2424) May be omitted). Thereafter, at the time when the first main game suspension occurs, the additional effect of the advantageous time is executed by the processing of step 2614 described later.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the effect mode switching process according to the subroutine of step 2800 (fifth) in FIG. 77. First, in step 2802, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the high profit continuation timer SM24t and determines whether or not the timer value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the background effect display control means SM23 adds the additional effect (the value added to the high profit continuation timer SM24t at the time of occurrence of a hold on the first main game side executed in step 2614). It is determined whether or not the effect of informing the user is being performed. In the case of Yes in step 2804, in step 2806, the background effect display control means SM23 executes a predetermined operation (in this example, long-pressing the sub input button SB (for example, being on for three consecutive seconds)). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2806, in step 2808, the background effect display control means SM23 executes switching of the set effect mode (battle mode → treasure mode or treasure mode → battle mode) (set). By switching the effect mode, the tendency of the effect such as the background effect, the notice effect, the additional effect described later, the operation mode of the sub input button SB, the frequency and the tendency of the effect using the sub input button SB, and the like are different. ), And proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2802, step 2804, or step 2806, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600). In the present example, the effect mode switching is configured to be disabled only during the execution of the additional effect. However, since the effect is configured so as not to hinder the effect that is being performed, for example, the predetermined mode before the additional effect is performed may be determined. The effect mode is also provided during a period, a predetermined period after the execution of the additional effect, during the execution of the effect relating to the additional effect, and during the execution of the continuity effect described later (while the effect relating to the end of the high profit state). May not be executed.

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the high profit state effect display processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (fifth) in FIG. 77. First, in step 2604, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the high profit continuation timer SM24t and determines whether or not the timer value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control means SM23 continuously displays the base effect ｛regardless of whether or not the special game is being executed based on the set effect mode. An effect (including a display of the total number of balls acquired and a stay time in a series of high profit states, an effect that is constantly displayed and updated), for example, a battle mode: an effect in which the leading character is fighting an enemy character, a treasure mode : A command to execute the effect｝ in which the leading character is searching for archeological sites is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Next, in step 2608, the announcement effect display control means SM24 displays the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t on the effect display device SG as a remaining time timer display (always displayed and updated during execution of the base effect). The command is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control processing in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2612.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2604, in other words, if the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t is 0, in step 2610, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether the continuation is possible / impossible (the first main game side has a big hit). This is an effect performed at the end of the fluctuation, and in this example, a command to execute the effect is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Move to step 2612. It should be noted that there are a plurality of types of the continuation effects, and the selection is made based on the set effect modes (battle mode, treasure mode) and the variation mode. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuation availability determination may be determined based on only the effect mode, or the continuation availability determination may be determined based only on the variation mode. Alternatively, it may be configured that the same production candidate can be determined by lottery).

  Also, in the fifth embodiment, during the high profit state (mainly during the auxiliary game advantageous state), an effect that is not synchronized with the fluctuation display of the main game symbol (in this example, the base effect executed in step 2606, and The additional effect performed in step 2614) is mainly executed, but the second half (in the present example, the second half 20 seconds) of the change that becomes a big hit on the first main game side, the continuation possibility effect in accordance with the end of the change Is configured to execute. Note that the present example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the first main game side may be configured to be able to execute the continuation enable / disable effect from the start time of a change that becomes a big hit. In the case of such a configuration, the execution time of the continuation availability effect is not 20 seconds in the present example, but the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation on the first main game side (50 seconds or 60 seconds in the present example).

  Next, in step 2612, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the additional effect execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the notice effect display control means SM24 sets the value added to the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b in step 2166. An additional effect to be notified is determined based on the effect mode set, and a command for executing the determined additional effect is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Next, in step 2616, the announcement effect display control means SM24 turns off the additional effect execution flag in the flag area of the announcement effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2618. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2612, the process shifts to step 2618.

  As described above, the fifth embodiment is configured to be able to execute an additional effect of notifying the value added to the high profit continuation timer value (an effect of increasing the value of the remaining time timer display). In this example, during the high profit state (mainly during the auxiliary game advantageous state), the fluctuation time (especially, The additional effect, which is an effect related to the first main game symbol fluctuation time), is configured to have a higher execution frequency (number of executions, execution time, and the like).

  Next, in step 2618, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main side, newly issues a normal game shift command (to the effect that the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c has become 0). (Information-related command) is determined. If Yes in step 2618, in step 2620 the notice effect display control unit SM24 sets a command for executing an effect indicating that the high profit state ends (in the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). To be sent to). Next, in step 2622, the announcement effect display control means SM24 turns off the high profit state flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2624, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the prefetch stop flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2618, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control processing in the high profit state according to the subroutine of step 2700 (fifth) in FIG. 77. First, in step 2702, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a new sorting game execution command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying a ball entry instruction effect to the second special winning opening C20 (sub-sub-control in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). (Transmitted to the section SS side) In the round relating to the sorting game, the second large winning opening C20 is opened so that the player hits the right (the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). Will be executed, and the process proceeds to step 2706. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2702, the processing shifts to step 2706.

  Next, in step 2706, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new specific area entry command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect indicating the entry of a game ball into the specific area C22 (sub-sub in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Transmitted to the control unit SS). Next, in step 2710, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific area entry flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2712. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing shifts to step 2712.

  Next, in step 2712, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been newly received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2712, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the finished special game is a special game related to the big hit symbol of the first main game side. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2714, in step 2716, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2716, in step 2450, the background effect display control means SM23 executes the above-described initial seconds determination processing. Next, in step 2718, on the effect display device SG, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a high profit continuation effect in which the timer value of the high profit continuation timer SM24t is reset in the remaining time timer display (the high profit continuation effect described above). A command for executing the same effect as the start effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). Next, in step 2720, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific area entry flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2900). I do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2716, in step 2722, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the completed special game is related to the short open big hit symbol (4A in this example). It is determined whether or not it is a special game. In the case of Yes in step 2722, in step 2724, the notice effect display control unit SM24 sets a command for executing an effect indicating that the high profit state ends (in the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). To be sent to). Next, in step 2726, the announcement effect display control means SM24 turns off the high profit state flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2728, the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the prefetch stop flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2722, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900). Here, in the case of No in step 2722, that is, in the case where the entry of the game ball to the specific area C22 is not detected during the special game related to the long open big hit on the first main game side in the high profit state, The effect is not particularly executed at the end of the special game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of No in step 2722, the game state shifts to a non-stochastic change / time reduction game state with a maximum of 20 changes. Therefore, an arrangement may be made so that an effect for notifying that effect can be executed.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2714, in step 2730 the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2730, in step 2732 the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific area entry flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next process (step 2900). Processing). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2730, in step 2734, the background effect display control means SM23 subtracts the value of the remaining time timer display and sets the value to 0 (in the high profit state, in the case of a long open big hit, A command to execute a specific effect which is executed only when no ball is entered into the area C22 is detected (transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900). ). Next, in step 2736, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the high profit continuation timer SM24t to zero, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). Note that also in the case of No in step 2712, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  Next, FIG. 86 is a timing chart related to the progress of a game in a high profit state in the fifth embodiment. First, in the non-probability varying game state (and the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game), at the timing 1 in the figure, the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “5A”, and the 2R special game is triggered. (Especially, a special game in which the second special winning opening C20 is opened for a long time). In the non-probability changing game state (and the auxiliary game disadvantage state), the game on the first main game side is mainly executed.

  Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the special game related to the big hit symbol “5A” is ended, and also because the entry into the specific area C22 is detected during the special game. , The state is changed to the probability varying game state, and the high profit state flag indicating that the special game is being performed in the auxiliary game advantageous state or the big hit in the auxiliary game advantageous state is turned on. In the fifth embodiment, during the probability varying game state, the auxiliary game is in the advantageous state, and the game on the second main game side and the game on the first main game side are mainly executed at the same time. The fluctuation time of the game symbol is relatively longer than the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol. For this reason, as shown in periods 2 to 3 and 4 to 7 in the drawing, while the first main game symbol (a symbol disadvantageous to the player) fluctuates once, the second main game symbol (the player) ) Fluctuates more than once. Here, as the longer time is selected as the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol, the number of times the second main game advantageous to the player changes during one fluctuation of the first main game symbol increases, 2. The expected value of the number of prize balls acquired by the jackpot on the main game side also increases.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “5B”, a special game of 2R (particularly, special opening of the second special winning opening C20 for a long time) is performed. Game) is executed. At this time, the special game winning probability shifts to the non-probability changing game state.

  Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the special game related to the big hit symbol “5B” is ended, and also because the entry into the specific area C22 is detected during the special game. The game is changed to the probability varying game state, and the high profit state flag indicating that the special game is being performed in the auxiliary game advantageous state or the big hit in the auxiliary game advantageous state is turned on. Here, during the period of 5 to 6 in the figure, since the special game is being executed, the fluctuation of the main game symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “4A”, a special game of 2R (particularly, a special game for short-opening the second special winning opening C20) is performed. Game) is executed. At this time, the special game winning probability shifts to the non-probability changing game state.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the special game related to the big hit symbol “4A” is ended, and the reason is that no ball has been detected in the specific area C22 during the special game. Thus, the high profit state flag is turned off.

  With the configuration described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be simultaneously changed (so-called parallel lottery type gaming machines). In addition, the second main game is more advantageous to the player than the first main game (first main game: probability of change probability of about 20%, second main game: probability of change probability of about 100%). Furthermore, when a game ball is fired (so-called right-handed) toward the second main game start port B10, the fired game ball can enter the first main game start port (2) A10-2. Have been. That is, even when trying to execute the second main game advantageous to the player, the first main game disadvantageous to the player is inevitably executed. As a result, as the fluctuation time of the first main game to be executed becomes longer, the rate at which the second main game is executed is relatively increased, and a new profit state is obtained for the player. It is possible to create gameplay. In addition, by determining in advance whether or not the first main game hold and the fluctuating time, and notifying the player of the period in which the high profit state is continued (in this example, while updating the remaining time timer display as needed), the high profit is notified. It is possible to suggest to the player a sense of danger that the profit state ends and an estimate of the number of prize balls that can be acquired, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Modification Example 1 from Fifth Embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation mode is determined by always referring to the same table during the high profit state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By changing the table that can be switched, it is possible to create a state in which the player has a different advantage (a selection candidate and / or a selection rate in the variation mode is different) in the high profit state. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example of the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 87 shows the first (second) of the subroutine of step 1400 (1) (fifth) and step 1400 (2) (fifth) in FIG. 70 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process. First, the changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 1410-4 (fifth modification 1) and step 1550 (fifth modification 1), the purpose of which is to execute processing for a limited frequency state described later. It is configured to be able to do so. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in step 1410-2, in step 1410-4 (fifth variation 1), the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51) -B) refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each game state, Based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly the variation mode lottery random number) and the limited frequency flag state, the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are determined by the first and second main games. The game symbol information is temporarily stored in the game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1412.

  Here, FIG. 88 is an example of a table referred to in step 1410-4 (fifth modification 1) of FIG. 87 in the first modification example from the fifth embodiment. First, the points different from the fifth embodiment are the big hit symbol in the second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B and the table configuration at the time of loss in the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B. The purpose is to provide a plurality of types of big hit symbols that can be selected on the second main game side, and to refer to a different table when the limited frequency flag is on than when the limited frequency flag is off.

  That is, in the first modification example from the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs on the second main game side, “5B” or “7B” is selected as the big hit symbol. In addition, when the limited frequency flag is on, a shorter fluctuation time (for example, B02: 0.5 second) is selected than when the limited frequency flag is off.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, after executing the specific game end determination processing in step 1500, in step 1550 (fifth variation 1), the game content determination means MN executes the limited frequency end determination processing described later, and The process moves to the process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (fifth variation 1) in FIG. 87 in the first modification example from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1566, the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the limited frequency counter MP53c, and determines whether or not the count value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1566, in step 1568, the limited frequency control means MP53 decrements the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1570, the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the limited frequency counter MP53c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the limited frequency control unit MP53 turns off the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1600). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1566 or 1572, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fifth) of FIG. 74 in the first modification example from the fifth embodiment. First, the changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 1785-8 (fifth modification 1) to step 1785-10 (fifth modification 1), and the purpose is a specific big hit symbol (for example, 7B). Is configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state when the special game according to the above is executed. That is, after executing the process for shifting to the probability variation game state in step 1785-2 and step 178-3, in step 178-8 (fifth variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets the first With reference to the second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed is a specific big hit symbol (for example, 7B). If Yes in step 1785-8 (fifth variation 1), in step 1785-9 (fifth variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (for example, 50) as the value of the limited frequency counter MP53c. I do. Next, in step 1785-10 (fifth variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1785-6. I do. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1785-8 (fifth variation 1), the processing shifts to step 1785-6.

  By changing as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the fifth embodiment, a specific jackpot symbol (in this example, a jackpot symbol “7B” on the second main gaming side) is used. After the execution of the special game, until a predetermined number of changes (in this example, 50 times) has elapsed, the selection candidates and / or the selection rates of the change mode are different from before the specific big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. (In this example, the fluctuation time related to the loss fluctuation on the second main game side becomes relatively short.) The state shifts to the limited frequency state. As a result, as compared with the fluctuation of the first main game side which is disadvantageous to the player, the fluctuation of the second main game side which is advantageous to the player is executed relatively more, so that the gaming state which is particularly advantageous to the player. (Limited frequency state in this example) can be created.

  In this example, when the specific big hit symbol (7A) is stopped and displayed on the second main game side (and the special game is finished), the fluctuation time related to the loss fluctuation on the second main game side is shortened. Although it is configured to shift to a limited frequency state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first main game side fluctuates due to a special game related to a predetermined big hit symbol on the first main game side. May be configured to be able to shift to a limited frequency state in which is longer. Further, the selection candidates and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the second main game side may be switched upon the stop display of the predetermined symbol on the first main game side, or the predetermined pattern on the second main game side may be switched. The configuration may be such that the selection candidate and / or the selection rate of the variation mode on the first main game side is switched upon the stop display of the symbol. Further, the design that is the trigger for shifting to the limited frequency is not limited to the big hit, and the display can be shifted to the limited frequency state with the stop display of the specific lost symbol or the small hit symbol (or the end of the small hit game) as an opportunity. May be. In addition, with the transition to the high profit state (for example, stop display of the long open big hit symbol), a limited frequency state in which the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol becomes longer as the symbol fluctuation is repeated (for example, In particular, the fluctuation time relating to the loss fluctuation on the first main game side is as follows: 1st to 5th fluctuation: 60 seconds on average, 6th to 10th fluctuation: 120 seconds on average, 11th to 15th fluctuation: 180 seconds on average, 16th fluctuation Thereafter: 240 seconds on average). Further, the lower limit of the number of acquired prize balls may be set by configuring the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol immediately after shifting to the high profit state to be a predetermined time or longer (for example, 100 seconds or longer). In addition, it is possible to configure the selection candidate and / or the selection rate of the variation mode in the limited frequency state to be different depending on the main game symbol which is a trigger for shifting to the limited frequency state, so that the profitability of the player can be adjusted rapidly. It becomes.

  Further, in this example, in the disadvantageous state of the auxiliary game, if the player wins the short open jackpot, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22, so the state does not shift to the auxiliary game advantageous state, and the prize can be obtained by the special game. Since the number of balls is also 1R, the profit of the player is small. Therefore, although not shown in the present example, in the special game on the first main game side, the lower limit of the number of winning prize balls at the time of the first hit may be set by increasing the number of rounds executed. . Further, in the present example, the high profit state is ended by mainly winning the short open jackpot on the first main game side during the high profit state. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the configuration may be such that the variation on the second main game side can be executed with priority, so that the profit of the player can be secured. For example, if a big hit symbol is set with a priority and a high-priority big hit change occurs, a low-priority big hit change is not executed (or a forced stop is performed with a lost symbol, and the change time is forcibly changed. Delaying the occurrence of a short open big hit, etc.). In addition, the processing when the other main game symbol becomes a big hit (or a small hit) (forcibly stopping and temporarily stopping the change in the lost symbol) may be made different depending on the big hit symbol. For example, in the case of a symbol change that results in a short opening big hit, if the other main game symbol becomes a big hit during the symbol change, forcibly stop with a lost symbol to reduce the chance of falling prevention. It can be provided.

  Although not shown in this example, as described in the fourth embodiment, an upper limit may be set on the number of consecutive big hits (probable changing big hits) that shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the special game (so-called “big hit”). , Limiter function). In that case, when the number of consecutive times of the probability change big hit reaches the upper limit number, by creating a transition zone to the non-probability fluctuation game state and the auxiliary game advantage state, to create a return zone to the probability fluctuation game state. Becomes possible. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present example executes the second main game within a time period in which the first main game symbol is performing the loss fluctuation, and obtains a prize ball in the special game on the second main game side. Because of the amusement, if the player leaves the seat during the high profit state, the profit of the player will be lost. Therefore, a specific entrance where a game ball can enter (pass or flow) is provided, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, when the entry of a game ball into the specific entrance is detected, By configuring so that the special game related to the big hit symbol is started, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped (the first main game side and the second main game side are both paused), and the game is played even in the high profit state. Players can leave their seats, and a more user-friendly gaming machine can be provided. In order to smoothly advance the game, the game may be configured not to be temporarily stopped except for a specific symbol (in particular, in the case of such a configuration, the timing at which the game is temporarily stopped is determined by the player It is preferable to be configured so as to be able to give notice in advance). In addition, if the player wants to start a special game, but it is difficult to enter the specific entrance, the stress is given to the player, and therefore, it is easy to enter the specific entrance. It is desirable to configure so that For example, when a specific entrance is provided upstream of the flow path of the game ball at the time of right-handed (for example, upstream from other entrances such as a starting opening, a general winning opening, a large winning opening, etc.), or when right-handed. May be provided at a position where a high probability of the game ball enters (for example, 90% or more of right-hit game balls enter). The specific entrance may also be used as another entrance. Here, it is preferable that the specific entrance does not inhibit entry of the ball into the special winning opening or the starting opening, and therefore, it is preferable that the specific entrance is an entrance through which the game ball passes. In addition, since the auxiliary game starting port H10 is often a ball entrance through which a game ball passes, in particular, the auxiliary game starting port H10 may also be configured to double as the specific ball entrance.

  Further, in the high profit state, when the entering of the game ball into the first main game starting port (2) A10-2 is not detected for a predetermined time or more. Particularly, in the situation where the second main game is executed If a ball is not detected in the first main game start port (2) A10-2 for a predetermined time or more, cheating (falsification of the first main game side which is disadvantageous to the player) May be performed, so that error notification may be executed. Note that even if the opening is the same for the first main game, the first main game starting port (1) A10 It is preferable that the entry into -1 does not hinder the execution of the error notification. In addition, regardless of detection of entering of a game ball, an error notification can be executed even when the first main game is not executed for a predetermined time or more in a situation where the second main game is executed. You may.

(Sixth embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, the gaming ability in which a payout is acquired by successive occurrences of small hit games has been described in detail. It is possible to further create a novel gaming property different from the above-mentioned gaming ability in a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by playing a ball. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the sixth embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, it is also supplemented that any of the above-described configurations can be applied to the sixth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below. First, the second special winning opening C20 is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped at the small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). The winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located to the upper right of the out opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 includes a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (and the second special winning opening). Mouth solenoid C24), and inside thereof, a special winning game (a game in which the first special winning opening C10 is opened in the present embodiment) to be described later. V winning opening entrance detection device C26s, which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of a game ball, and the game balls entering the second winning opening C20 are directly discharged out of the second winning opening C20 or the V winning opening. And a sorting role C23 for sorting whether to be once guided to C26. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second special winning opening entering information indicating the entry at the time of entering the ball. Generate The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric role-playing object C21d sets the second big winning opening C20 in a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to enter the second big winning opening C20 and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. (Varies by exciting the second winning port solenoid C24). In the present embodiment, the second special winning opening motor-operated character C21d is a plate-shaped member like the first special winning opening motor-operated character C11d. Unlike this, a mode is adopted in which the game board (game area D30) is variable in the vertical direction. That is, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is substantially completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an evacuation state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). A state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) until approaching the board D16 is adopted. The second big winning port electric auditorium C21d projects from the game board (game area D30) and can receive game balls flowing down the game area D30. The ball plays a role as a lid of the second winning opening C20), that is, when the second winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extends). When the game ball can enter the second big winning opening C20), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and hence the second big winning opening C20d) is in a case where the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d takes the advanced state. It is configured such that the game ball cannot enter into the special winning opening C20 (the box-shaped member is substantially closed). Then, it is determined whether the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is directly discharged to the outside of the second special winning opening C20 by the sorting role C23, or is once guided to the V special winning opening C26. It is configured to be sorted.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C26 and lights up or the like to play an effect (an effect of notifying a player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). This is a device for executing the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (a second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol. And a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). (The number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). Note that the first main game symbol display section A21g (the second main game symbol display section B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbols (the second main game symbols) are "0" to "9". Is displayed with ten kinds of numbers and "-" of a loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for a player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use a symbol or the like to display the information. Also, the display of the number of holds is not limited to the configuration of four lamps, but is configured to be able to display the number of hold of up to four lamps (for example, it is configured of one lamp, Equation 1: lighting, holding number 2: low-speed blinking, holding number 3: medium-speed flashing, holding number 4: high-speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a staging role, in the sixth embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is used. The size of) is set to an inconspicuous degree. However, in a case where the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a staging role and does not display the first decoration symbol (second decoration symbol), an effect described later is used. The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol, and the like. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which an effect is performed including a change display of a decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information and, for example, a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbol variations imitating a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying Although the effect display device SG is constituted by a liquid crystal display in the sixth embodiment, it may be constituted by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and these lamps are linked to the hold lamps of the main game symbols.

  The above is the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Prior to the description of the features of the sixth embodiment, the outline of the game developed on the gaming board will be outlined. First, the game ball fired toward the game area D30 flows down a downflow route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), It flows down a downflow route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), or is roughly divided into two. Here, the game ball that has flowed down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first big winning opening C10, while the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route has an auxiliary The opportunity to enter the ball at the game starting port H10, the second big winning port C20, the second main game starting port B10, and the first big winning port C10 can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to be easier to enter the first big winning opening C10 than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route (" “Easy” and “difficult to enter” are determined, for example, by the number of entering balls when 10,000 balls are fired on a right-hit route and a left-hit route, respectively.)

  On the left-handed route (not shown), the game balls are guided or not guided toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and windmills. Adopts various flowing modes, on the right-handed route (not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is smaller than that of the left-handed route, and the game ball has a substantially uniform flowing manner. take.

  More specifically, with respect to the right-handed route, first, a game ball fired aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launching intensity of the game ball by the launching device is the maximum, also referred to as right-handed) , Jumps in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32, and collides with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area), thereby falling due to its own weight. Start. Next, after the dropped game ball enters the auxiliary game start port H10 immediately below the ball with a high probability, the flow passage width becomes larger than one game ball and less than two game balls. The ball is collected at D50 (regardless of whether or not the ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, after the game ball flowing down along the straightening passage D50 is released from the exit of the straightening passage D50, the first-stage passage D51- which is slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction and has a three-stage configuration. 1, after rolling on each of the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3, they are discharged toward the out port D36.

  Here, the first-stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state, while the second-stage passage D51-2 and the third-stage passage D51-3 are formed. The game ball passage formed of a synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed to the game board in advance. In other words, when the second special winning opening electric auditorium C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first special winning opening electric auditorium C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the exit of the rectification passage D50. Game balls released from the first stage passage D51-1 roll on the first stage passage D51-1 → game balls released from the first stage passage D51-1 roll on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3. The game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36. , And so on.

  As described above, since the game balls flowing down the right-handed route adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at approximately 0.6 second intervals), the auxiliary When the ball stably enters the game start port H10 and the second big winning port electric accessory C21d is in an opened state (evacuated state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the second big winning port). C20) can be configured to stably enter the first special winning opening C10 when the first special winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened. In addition, in the space until the game ball discharged from the second-stage passage D51-2 reaches the third-stage passage D51-3, a second main game start port electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state is provided. An object B11d is provided, and when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in an advanced state, a game ball can be guided toward the second main game starting port B10. However, this point will be described later.

  In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the exit of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first-stage passage D51-1, that is, the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, the second special winning opening electric auditors product C21d may be damaged. Therefore, at least at the exit of the rectification passage D50, a configuration for reducing the momentum of the game ball flowing down (substantially falling) in the rectification passage D50 is essential. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure near the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 has a shape protruding toward the inside of the rectifying passage D50. Is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball by falling in a zigzag manner. In the present embodiment, a structure for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 by the same reasoning is provided. Will be described later.

  Next, a configuration for reducing the momentum (rolling speed) of a game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, the first-stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The big winning opening electric accessory C21d itself is a plate-shaped member. Therefore, since the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, unless some measure is taken to reduce the momentum of the game ball, Even if the second big winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state, in particular, a series of displacement from the advanced state to the retracted state to the advanced state is instantaneously performed (for example, about 0.1 second). ), There is a possibility that the game ball cannot be successfully guided to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and, consequently, in the second winning port C20). Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in the flow path shape provided near the exit of the rectifying passage D50, a device for causing the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 to move in a zigzag manner is provided. is there.

  More specifically, within a range in which the game ball rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1, a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the game board surface side, and a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the transparent plate D16 side. And the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are arranged alternately. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the surface of the game board, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are directly formed on the rear surface of the transparent plate D16. If the sticking is performed, if the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine or the like, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are exposed to the outside. There is a possibility that a person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (in the worst case, peel off) (it is also difficult to reuse the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine) . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the sixth embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side among the wall surfaces of the box-shaped member C20-1 is moved to the second winning combination electric motor in the advanced state. The plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are configured to be extended upward from the object C21d and fixed to the wall surface of the elongated box-shaped member C20-1.

  As described above, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within a range in which the game ball rolls on the first step passage D51-1, the first step is performed. Since the game balls rolling on the passage D51-1 progress zigzag, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to decrease. Here, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at an interval of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game balls discharged from the exit of the straightening passage D50 is reduced. The game ball that reaches the first-stage passage D51-1 and rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1 is further rolled on the first-stage passage D51-1 because the momentum of the game ball is further reduced. As a result of the long period, even if the second big winning port electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended). Can successfully guide the game ball to the second big winning opening C20). In addition, the fact that the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is decelerated means that when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the distance between the game balls is reduced. Is reduced (a traffic jam of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 occurs). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls exist on the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1). In this case, the second special winning prize is provided. Even if the mouth-powered accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of the plurality of pieces are transferred to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and, consequently, into the second big winning opening C20). It is also possible to collectively guide the game balls (an image diagram is shown in the lower part of the figure).

  Next, an operation mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, in the space until the game ball released from the second-stage passage D51-2 reaches the third-stage passage D51-3, the second main path that can take the retracted state and the advanced state is provided. A game starting port electric accessory B11d is provided (the meaning of the evacuation state and the advance state is the same as that of the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d, but as will be described below, the second main game start is performed). In the case of the mouth-powered accessory B11d, the game ball is in an open state in which the game ball easily enters the second main game start port B10 when the advance state is taken, and the game is played in the second main game start port B10 when the evacuation state is taken. The ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball). Here, in the sixth embodiment, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is instantaneously displaced to the advanced state (open state) because of the special playability described later. Even if, {especially, when a series of displacements from the evacuation state → the advance state → the evacuation state is performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 second)}, the second main game start port B10 is entered. It is configured so that it can physically secure that it does not ball.

  More specifically, the game ball rolling on the second stage passage D51-2 which is slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and the third stage passage D51 Start falling by -3 toward -3. Here, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third-stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d itself is capable of receiving the dropped game ball and the second main game. In addition to having a shape extending to the starting opening B10 and being installed so as to be slightly inclined rightward with respect to the horizontal direction, the falling game sphere is the second main game starting opening B10. (The traveling direction of the game ball is switched from left to right as shown in the third row in FIG. 3). And when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d maintains the advanced state until the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 reaches the second main game starting port B10. In the meantime, while the ball enters the second main game starting port B10 as it is, the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game starting port B10 reaches the second main game starting port B10. When the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is displaced to the retracted state, it falls toward the third-stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game starting port B10 (FIG. 8). The subsequent game ball in the fourth row is equivalent).

  In the case of such a configuration, the time required for the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game start port B10 to reach the second main game start port B10 is about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds. By designing so that the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d in the evacuation state is instantaneously displaced to the advance state, it is possible to make the evacuation state → the advance state → the evacuation state. When a series of displacements is performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 second), it can be physically secured that the ball will not enter the second main game start port B10.

  First, FIG. 94 is a main flowchart illustrating a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M according to the sixth embodiment. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the processing of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initialization (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M checks the input port of the RAM clear button, and resets the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the game arcade or the like. If Yes in step 1002, the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side in step 1004. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM (even if transmitted at the timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the RAM stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are abnormal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is not backed up in the RAM accurately) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (the above-described RAM clearing process). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing, and a control command described later will be described. Transmission may be performed by transmission processing), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a periodic interruption (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is assumed to be T). As a result, when the execution-timed interrupt timing has been reached, FIG. 14B is executed. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, increment processing of a random number counter) until the next regular interrupt timing is reached.

  It is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to a value at which the special game is executed (the noise or the improper behavior immediately after the start of the processing of the program). This prevents the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for performing the special game is determined.

  Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 2B based on an interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interruption period T arrives (for example, a hardware interruption every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a later-described electric accessory driving determination process. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1850 (sixth), the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in Step 1900 (sixth), the main control board M executes the later-described sorting component control process. Next, in step 1950 (sixth), the main control board M executes a later-described V winning opening ball entry determination process. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning port where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is caused to execute the process, and a process for managing the result is executed (in the sixth embodiment, the number of prize balls based on one winning in the first main game starting port A10 is represented by “ "3", the number of prize balls based on one winning in the second main game starting port B10 is "3", the number of prize balls based on one winning in the first large winning opening C10 is "15", The prize ball payout control process is executed by setting the number of prize balls based on one winning in the two major winning opening C20 to “3”. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, and the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above-described processes to the sub-main control unit side), which is executed immediately before execution of the interrupt process. The process returns to the previous process. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the main control board M is configured to transmit the commands in the order in which the commands are determined to be transmitted (the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, at the time of the NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 94. First, in step 1202, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control unit MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage unit MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H to determine whether or not there is a reserved ball relating to the auxiliary game symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to change the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). At the same time, with reference to the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H, a stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). Is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and is temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol The predetermined time related to the fluctuation time 時間 For example, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0.1 seconds (that is, a time shorter than 0.6 seconds between firing of the game balls), and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off, 10 seconds (that is, a time longer than 0.6 seconds between firing of game balls) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding unit MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the fluctuation display of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C to determine whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol with reference to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and acquires the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is definitely displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition judgment means MP21-B judges whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the auxiliary game side game state (the auxiliary game time reduction flag state). The starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time relating to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 2.0 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0 when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). .12 seconds). Next, in step 1234, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1242, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game starting port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B and sets the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily sets the auxiliary game state. The electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the storage unit MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1242, at step 1243, the second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B causes the second main game starting port entrance detecting device B11s to input the second main game starting port. Based on the ball information, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number (one in this example) of balls has been entered in the second main game start port B10. If Yes in step 1243, the process proceeds to step 1244, and if No in step 1243, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1300). If the answer is No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242. If the result is No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224. If the result is No in Steps 1206, 1224, and 1230, the next process (Step 1300) is performed. Processing).

  Here, the relationship between the type of the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol and the opening mode of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d in the sixth embodiment is shown in the margin of the figure. In the present embodiment, there are a stop symbol "D0" and a hit symbol "D1" as types of stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols, and when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off (in a non-time shortening game state). In the case where the loss symbol "D0" is selected substantially deterministically, while the auxiliary game time reduction flag is ON (in the time reduction game state), the hit symbol "D1" is selected approximately deterministically. It is configured. When the hit symbol “D1” is stopped and displayed when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off (in the non-time-saving game state), the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is set to “0.12 seconds”. If the hit symbol "D1" is stopped and displayed while the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on (during the time-reduced game state) while being closed after "opening", the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is closed after "open for 2.0 seconds". However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is not a well-known tulip type, and a flat member provided so as to be buried in the game board surface is a player. In this case, a flat shape is adopted in a mode in which an advancing state, which is a state protruding to the side, and a retreating state, a state in which the player is retracted with respect to the player side, is adopted (a so-called tongue-type electric chew). It takes about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds for the game ball falling on the member to roll on the plate-shaped member and enter the second main game start port B10. It is configured. That is, if the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is “opened for 0.12 seconds” (≒ the period during which the flat member is maintained in the advanced state is 0.12 seconds), for example, Even if the second main game starting port B11d is opened, the second main game starting port B10 is configured not to enter the ball. Also, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is scheduled to perform “open for 2.0 seconds” (≒ the period in which the flat member is maintained in the advanced state is 2.0 seconds). Also in this case, when a predetermined number (one in this example) of incoming balls is present in the second main game start port B10, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is closed, in other words, the second main game start port B10 is closed. Before the period in which the plate-shaped member is maintained in the advanced state has expired, the plate-shaped member is in the retracted state, so that, for example, a subsequent game ball moves on the plate-shaped member (the second main game). Even if it rolls (toward the starting port B10), the subsequent game ball falls without reaching the second main game starting port B10. In other words, even when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is to perform “open for 2.0 seconds”, a predetermined number (in this example, one It is configured so that it is easy to ensure that only the incoming ball is generated.

  In the present flowchart, for convenience, the process immediately proceeds to the next step after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, but is not limited thereto. In such a case, the process may be shifted to the next process after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by performing a branch process using a fixed stop display flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 94. First, in step 1302, the first main game starting port entrance determining means MJ11-A sends the first main game starting port entry information from the first main game starting port entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting port A10. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and executes the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side is not the upper limit (four in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / rejecting random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the fluctuation random number random numbers for obtaining the random numbers are obtained. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained in series at this timing (for example, only the random number random number is a so-called hardware random number, Others may be so-called software random numbers). Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding unit MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether the command relating to the newly generated hold (the number of holds, the held random number value, or a pass / fail result determined in advance based on the held random number value or the main The stop symbol of the game symbol, information on the variation mode, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Is performed), and the process proceeds to step 1312. Also, if No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start port entrance judging means MJ11-B sends the second main game start port entrance ball from the second main game start port entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1313 (sixth), the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B determines that the predetermined error condition relating to illegal entry into the second main game start port B10 is not satisfied. It is determined whether or not there is. Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d and the like in the non-time shortening game state (tentatively, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d). Does not enter the second main game start port B10 (even if the second main game start port B10 is opened). It is difficult for the second main game starting port B10 to have more than a predetermined number (one in this example) of entering balls at the second main game starting port B10. A condition for monitoring whether or not a ball has entered the second main game start port B10 contrary to (design) is set. In the case of Yes in step 1313, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and executes the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the side is not the upper limit (four in this example). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B obtains the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the second main game content determining random number, three random numbers, ie, a winning / rejecting random number, a symbol random number, and a variation mode random number, are obtained in the same manner as in the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the success / failure random number for the first main game and the success / failure random number for the second main game) Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding unit MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether or not the command relating to the newly generated hold (the number of holds, the held random number value, or a pass / fail result determined in advance based on the held random number value, The stop symbol of the game symbol, information on the variation mode, etc.) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Is performed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  In the case of No in step 1313 (sixth), that is, the process in the case of satisfying the predetermined error condition relating to the illegal entry of the ball into the second main game start port B10 is not particularly limited. If there is a ball in the second main game start port B10 in the game state, only error notification is executed to continue the game progress, while the second main game start port B10 is in the time shortened game state. If there is more than a predetermined number (for example, 6) of incoming balls, an error notification may be executed and the game progress may be stopped (the process after this process may be interrupted). The process in 1322 (sixth) corresponds to｝. The error notification execution conditions are as follows: (1) When the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened once, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is activated and the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is operated. When there is more than a predetermined number (for example, 6) of balls in the starting port B10, (2) the second main game starting when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is closed during the game. If the number of balls entering the mouth B10 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, three), (3) the second main game starting port after the timing when the error notification condition of (1) or (2) is satisfied. Each time one game ball enters B10, (4) a game ball enters the second main game start opening B10 in a situation where the main game symbols except during the special game and the small hit game are not changed. If so, it may be.

  In step 1308 and step 1318, the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. Is stored, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information relating to the “main game content determining random number” is stored in a byte storing information relating to the main game content determining random number (various timers). It is preferable that other information such as a value is not stored. (When operating another data stored in the same one byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like.) In order to prevent that from happening). In addition, regarding the winning / rejecting random number, a change in the game state (before the game state related to the hold already recorded) is obtained from the acquisition of the winning / rejecting random number to the execution of the winning / rejecting random number related to the random number. In addition to the change, there is a possibility that a change in the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, and the game state at the time of executing the random lottery according to the random number is unpredictable.) Is executed, the random number is stored.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} (sixth) in FIG. is there. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the process on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve digestion control means MJ31 determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not a special game (or a condition device is operating) (for example, a special game execution flag described later is not turned on) and a main game symbol is not changing (for example, a changing flag described later). Is not on), the main game symbol is on hold, and the small hit game is not in progress (for example, the small hit execution flag described later is not on), and the variable fixed time is not in the fixed time (for example, described later) The condition is that the fluctuation fixed flag is not turned on, and the like (otherwise, as described above, the case where the progress of the game is not interrupted is also included in the condition).

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digestion control unit MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage unit MJ32b-B). The temporarily stored first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol change is read out, and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the temporarily stored remaining information is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, at step 1408, the winning / rejecting lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / rejecting lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and Based on the game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (especially, the winning random selection random number), the main game symbol win / fail lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 99 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game hit / withdrawal lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of the hit / fail judgment table on the first main game side and the second main game side, that is, it has a so-called probability variation function. (It is a feature of the present embodiment that a plurality of big hits can be continued in a short period of time without having a probability variation function). Instead, the type of hit is a big hit {a so-called round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") that can be executed a plurality of times) and a small hit (a so-called round can be executed only once). As will be described later, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit, a big hit is induced (even if the result of the hit / not-judgment does not become a big hit) as described later. Have been. Note that the configuration for inducing the big hit may be realized on at least one of the first main game side and the second main game side, and therefore, the case where the result of the hit determination is a small hit is the first main game side. And at least one of the tables on the second main game side. (However, as described later, in order to make a plurality of big hits in a short period, It is preferable to configure the table for determination to win the small hit). In this embodiment, in particular, the second main game side is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (approximately 1/6) (assuming that there are four reservations on the second main game side). In the case where the small hit is won at about 1/6, the expectation of winning the small hit is about 50% until the reservation of the four pieces is completed. The configuration of the main game table 1 is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to provide a small hit on the first main game side, and it is not necessary to provide a loss on the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) sets the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination). With reference to the lottery table MN41ta-B), the stop symbols related to the main game symbols are determined based on the result of the main game symbol success / failure lottery and the first main game content decision random number (the second main game content decision random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). And temporarily store them in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 99 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit is won, one main game symbol is selected from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “7A” and “7B”). It is configured to be determined as a symbol. The number of rounds of the special game and the opening time of the special winning opening determined with reference to the main game symbol are "4A" for "7A" and "15R" for "7B". Note that the random number value and the type of stop symbol are also examples only, and are not limited thereto. In the sixth embodiment, the number of special game rounds related to the first main game and the number of special game rounds related to the second main game are made different from each other to make the number of game balls obtainable during the special game different. However, the number of rounds of the special game related to the first main game and the number of rounds of the special game related to the second main game are both set to “15R”. By making them different, the number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game may be made different.

  Next, in step 1416, the first main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game fluctuation mode determination means MN51-B) selects the first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta corresponding to each game state. -A (the second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), and the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery Based on the random numbers), the main game symbols are determined in a fluctuating manner, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 99 is an example of a first main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, based on the result of the winning or losing of the main game symbol and the main game time reduction flag state, the fluctuation mode (variation mode) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random value (particularly the fluctuation mode lottery random number) Time) can be determined. For example, if the winning or losing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit) with respect to a certain random value, a change mode in which the change time is relatively long is easily determined, and the main game time reduction flag is turned on. In the case of (time-saving gaming state), the change mode in which the change time is relatively short is easily determined (other characteristic items regarding the change time will be described later). This example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selectivity, and the like. Further, the symbol change time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long. {Symbol change on the second main game side} Is executed so that it is advantageous for the player, the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side is reduced, so that the second main game side is likely to be held (which is advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port of the first main game side and the starting port of the second main game side cannot be distinguished from each other in order to construct a situation.

  Further, as shown in the figure, in this example, the variation time of the second main game symbol in the non-time shortening game state is 15 seconds at the time of loss and 60 seconds at the time of hit (big hit, small hit). Only the type of variation time is configured to be selected, and in the non-time shortening game state, the same effect (the effect relating to the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later) is made in accordance with the variation time. It is configured to be executed (in the case of a hit, an effect for notifying the hit is executed after the effect at the time of loss is executed). Note that the configuration of the main game table 3 is not limited to this, and the shortest fluctuation time of the first main game side in consideration of all the game states, the result of the match, and the number of holds is determined by all the game states and the result of the match. It may be configured to be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time of the second main game side in consideration of the number of suspensions. For example, as the case of the shortest fluctuation time, the non-time shortened game state and the first In the case where the number of main game reservations is the maximum number and loses (or when the time is reduced and the time is reduced), the shortest fluctuation time on the first main game side is set to "1 second", The shortest fluctuation time on the second main game side when the number of the 2 main game reservations is the maximum number and the loss is good may be “3 seconds”. In addition, only the variation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened game state, the type and selection rate of the change time selection candidate depend on the number of main game reservations. Others (for example, the first main game in the time shortened game state) Side fluctuation, fluctuation of the second main game side in the non-time shortened game state, and fluctuation of the second main game side in the time shortened game state).

  Next, in step 1450 (sixth), the game content determination means MN executes a variable fixed time determination process described later. Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN sets the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , The information about the determined main game symbol such as the fluctuation mode information and the command related to the current game state) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM by the processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. I do. Next, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display part A21g (first main game symbol display unit A21 of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display section B21g), the fluctuation display of the main game symbols is started according to the fluctuation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1424, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Move to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428. On the other hand, if No in step 1426, in step 1440, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation fixed flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1438 described later) is on. If Yes in step 1440, the process moves to step 1441, and if No in step 1440, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol change is finished to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). The change display of the main game symbols on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the fixed variation time related to the variation determined in step 1450 (sixth) in the fixed variation timer MN30t, Start the timer. Next, in step 1438, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the variable fixed flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. , To step 1441.

  Next, in step 1441, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the variable fixed time timer MN30t and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1441, in step 1442, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variable fixed state in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1444. On the other hand, if No in step 1441, the process moves to the next process (the process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1444, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1444, in step 1445, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is a command to execute a jackpot symbol stop command {described below, a V winning detection effect, and the present embodiment In the, the same effect as when a game ball is won in the V winning opening C26 is executed, whereby the game is performed by right-handing (adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). Set to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM, which is intended to make the player feel that the progress of the game at the time of execution is smooth. It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1446, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1444, at step 1447, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1447, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b in step 1448, and proceeds to step 1500. It should be noted that, also in the case of No in step 1447, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, in step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (sixth) in FIG. First, in step 1452, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b and determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is on (in other words, in the time reduction game state). Then, it is determined whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a state where it is easy to open and the second main game starting port B10 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to the second main game symbol. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to a small hit. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be a long time (30 seconds in this example), and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1418). I do. As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of the time reduction game state and the end of the fluctuation related to the small hit on the second main game side, the time for causing the second main game side to hold is secured (the details will be described later). However, in the present embodiment, a large number of game balls are obtained according to whether or not the second main game side hold generated in the time shortened game state is digested in the non-time shortened game state and the small hit is won. It is important to ensure that the second main game side holds the hold up to the hold upper limit number in the time-saving game state, since the playability is determined to be possible or not.) It is configured to be long. The configuration in which the holding of the second main game side is generated up to the upper limit number of holdings is not limited to this. During the small hitting game won in the time-saving game state (small hitting game start demonstration time, small hitting time, (A period during which the second winning port C20 relating to the game is opened) or may be generated during a change related to a small hit that has been won in the time-saving game state.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, step 1454 or step 1456, in step 1462, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be short (0.2 seconds in this example), and (Step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 97. First, in step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the count value is larger than 0 with reference to the time reduction counter MP52c. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by one (decrement). Next, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508 and step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. (Step 1600). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 1502 or Step 1506, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 94. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and sets a condition device operation flag (as described above, the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is a big hit). This flag is turned on when the pattern is stopped and displayed, but is also turned on when a small hit game is executed and a ball enters the V winning opening C26 as described later.) Is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 (sixth), the special game control means MP30 sets the specific game flag (main game time reduction flag / auxiliary game time reduction flag) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. ) Off. Next, in step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game shift permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (sixth) in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and after the end of the special game related to the first main game side (the first main game). After the special game related to the big hit symbol and after the special game related to the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26 triggered by the stop of the first main game small hit symbol). I do. If Yes in step 1752, the process moves to step 1755. On the other hand, if No in step 1752, in other words, if the special game related to the second main game symbol has ended, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first / second main game symbol information temporary storage means With reference to MB11b-C, after the end of the special game won in the time reduction game state (after the special game relating to the second main game big hit symbol and to the V winning opening C26 triggered by the stop of the second main game small hit symbol) (Including both after and after the special game related to the entry of the game ball). In the case of Yes in step 1754, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800) (the gaming state becomes the non-time-saving gaming state), and in the case of No in step 1754, the processing shifts to step 1755. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, after the end of the special game related to the first main game side, the game state after the end of the special game is determined without depending on the game state at the time of the special game winning. After the end of the special game on the second main game side, the game state after the end of the special game is determined depending on the game state at the time of winning the special game.

  Next, in step 1755, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in step 1756 and step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the following processing The processing shifts to 1850 (sixth) processing (1).

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (sixth) in FIG. 94. First, in step 1851, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b, and sets a discharge standby flag フ ラ グ a flag that is turned on in step 1822 described later. After the execution of the small hitting game (particularly, the planned opening pattern of the second winning opening C20) that has been performed, a waiting period for discharging the game balls remaining in the second winning opening C20 (discharging standby). It is determined whether or not the flag｝ that is turned on during (time) is off. If Yes in step 1851, in step 1852, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game-related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, in step 1854, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns off the small hitting flag in the flag area of the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1855, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the second big winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in the case of the small hitting symbol "2AK": open → close for 0.73 seconds). In the case of the small hit symbol "4AK": Repeat "open for 0.13 seconds → close for 0.5 seconds" three times → open for 0.13 seconds → close, for the small hit symbol "7AK": open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 5.87 seconds → Repeat “Open for 0.13 seconds → Close for 0.87 seconds” twice → Open for 0.25 seconds → Close, for small hit design “BK”: Open for 0.09 seconds → 5. Close for 91 seconds → Repeat “open for 0.09 seconds → close for 0.91 seconds” five times → open for 0.09 seconds → close). Next, in step 1856, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1857, the small hitting game control means MP40 determines whether or not the sorting role component operation start permission flag (distribution role component C23, which will be described later) (Which is a flag that triggers operation). Next, in step 1858, in step 1810, the small hitting game control means MP40 opens the second big winning port C20 and starts the small hitting game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1859, the small hitting game control means MP40 starts a discharge standby timer MP41t-2 (increment timer), and proceeds to step 1812. In the present embodiment, the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 measures the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game, and the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 waits for a predetermined time (13 seconds in this example) from the start of the small hitting. The time is configured to end. Of course, the method of measuring the discharge waiting time is not limited to this, and for example, a scheduled small hitting game (in particular, a scheduled opening of the second big winning opening C20) The measurement may be started after the execution of the pattern is completed (in that case, assuming that the discharge waiting time is uniform, in the case of the small hit symbol “2AK”, the small hit is earlier than the other ones). The game will end).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. I do. If Yes in step 1810, the process moves to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hitting game control means MP40 determines whether or not there is a winning (ball entry) in the second big winning opening C20 with reference to the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. In the case of Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game-related information temporary storage means MP40b and places a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second big winning opening C20. Is determined. If Yes in step 1814, the process moves to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the small hitting game timer MP41t for a predetermined time related to opening the special winning opening (in this example, for example, For hit symbol "2AK": open for 0.73 seconds → close, for small hit symbol "4AK": repeat "open for 0.13 seconds → close for 0.5 seconds" three times → open for 0.13 seconds → close , Small hit pattern "7AK": open for 0.13 seconds → close for 5.87 seconds → repeat “open for 0.13 seconds → close for 0.87 seconds” twice → open for 0.25 seconds → close, small hit For pattern "BK": open for 0.09 seconds → close for 5.91 seconds → repeat “open for 0.09 seconds → close for 0.91 seconds” five times → open for 0.09 seconds → close)) It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops driving the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d and closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the small hitting game control means MP40 turns on the discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the small hitting game related information temporary storage means MP40b (the discharge waiting time starts from the execution timing of this processing). The process proceeds to step 1824. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 1851, the processing shifts to Step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 and determines whether or not the timer value has reached the discharge standby time end value (13 seconds in this example). . In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1825, the small hitting game control means MP40 clears the discharge standby timer MP41t-2 to zero. Next, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the discharge waiting flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1828, the small hitting game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hitting game timer MP41t. Next, in step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1900). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1810, step 1816 or step 1824, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1900).

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the sorting role object control processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 (sixth) in FIG. 94. First, in Step 1902, the sorting role object control unit MN60 refers to the flag area of the sorting role item related information temporary storage unit MN60b, and determines whether the sorting role object operation start permission flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the sorting role object control unit MN60 turns off the sorting role object operation start permission flag in the flag area of the sorting role item related information temporary storage unit MN60b. Next, in Step 1906, the distribution role control unit MN60 starts a distribution role activation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, in step 1908, the distribution role control unit MN60 turns on the distribution role operating flag in the flag area of the distribution role relation-related information temporary storage unit MN60b. Next, in Step 1910, the distribution role object control means MN60 operates the distribution role object C23 to the second position, and proceeds to Step 1912. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1902, the processing shifts to step 1912. Here, in the present embodiment, the sorting role object C23 is the first position as an initial position (a position where a portion where game balls are stored is upward when viewed from the player, and In a certain case, when a game ball enters the second special winning opening C20, the game ball is stopped at the position where the entered game ball is stored in the sorting role object C23). In addition, the second position is a position where the portion where the game balls are stored is rightward as viewed from the player (when the game ball enters the second big winning opening C20 in the position, (A position where the entered game ball is not stored in the sorting role object C23).

  Next, in step 1912, the distribution role control unit MN60 refers to the flag area of the distribution role related information temporary storage unit MN60b, and determines whether the distribution role active flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1912, in step 1914, the distribution role control unit MN60 refers to the distribution role activation timer MN60t, and sets the timer value to the first operation value (when the distribution role changes from the second position to the second position). It is a timer value that operates at one position, and is the same timing as the opening timing of the second big winning opening C20 at the time of the small hitting game related to the small hitting symbol "7AK" and the small hitting symbol "BK", In this example, it is determined whether or not 6 seconds have been reached. In the case of Yes at Step 1914, at Step 1916, the distribution role object control means MN60 operates the distribution role object C23 to the first position, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1950).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1914, at step 1918, the sorting role control unit MN60 refers to the sorting role actuation timer MN60t, and sets the timer value to the second operation value (the sorting role is the first position). To the second position, and it is the timing during the discharge waiting time for the small hit game, in this example, 12 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the sorting role object control means MN60 operates the sorting role item C23 to the second position, and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1950). In addition, at the timing of the processing of step 1920, if game balls are stored in the sorting role object C23, the game balls enter the V winning opening C26 with the processing as an opportunity.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1918, at step 1922, the distribution role control unit MN60 refers to the distribution role activation timer MN60t, and sets the timer value to the third operation value (the distribution position is the second position , The timer value that operates to the first position, and in this example, 12.5 seconds). In the case of Yes in Step 1922, in Step 1924, the sorting role object control means MN60 operates the sorting role item C23 to the first position. Next, in step 1926, the sorting role control unit MN60 turns off the sorting role operating flag in the flag area of the sorting role related information temporary storage means MN60b. Next, in step 1928, the distribution role control unit MN60 clears the distribution role activation timer MN60t to zero, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1950 (sixth)}. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1912 or 1922, the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 1950 (sixth)}.

  Here, the upper right part of FIG. The initial position of the distributing role object C23 is the first position, which is operated at the same time as the small hitting game is started, to the second position. The second position → the initial position (the first position) ”. It should be noted that, in effect, the distributing role operation timer value becomes the first operation value and becomes the first position. → A game ball enters the second big winning opening C20 → a game ball reaches the distribution role C23. Yes → Gaming balls are stored in the sorting role C23 → The sorting role activation timer value becomes the second operation value and the second position is reached → The stored game balls enter the V winning opening C26. Is performed, a big hit (special game) is induced.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the V winning opening ball entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (sixth) in FIG. 94. First, in step 1952, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and sets a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, discharge It is determined whether or not the flag which is turned on when a game ball enters the V winning port C26 during the standby time is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the V winning opening control means MN70 refers to the V winning opening ball determination means MJ11-V, and determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C26. I do. In the case of Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the V winning opening control means MN70 is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hitting game to the end timing of the discharge standby time related to the small hitting game). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the V winning opening control means MN70 transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect described later) to the sub main control unit SM side. In the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Although not shown, at the timing of this processing execution, an error notification is executed at the time of a small hit game relating to a small hit symbol ("2AK", "4AK" in this example) that should not enter the V winning opening C26. It is configured to be. Next, in step 1960, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1997). I do.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1952, in step 1962, the V winning opening control unit MN70 sets the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hitting game to the end timing of the discharge waiting time related to the small hitting game). It is determined whether or not has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the V winning opening control means MN70 turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and performs the next processing (processing in step 1997). ). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). In the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of illegal entry such as a game ball entering the V winning opening C26 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that an error processing is appropriately executed. The number of rounds of the special game related to the ball entering the V winning opening C26 is “15R”, and the sequence of “small hitting game → special game related to the ball entering the V winning port C26” is added up. Then, the number of rounds related to the small hit game “1R” and the number of rounds related to the special game “15R” are “16R”.

  Next, a control process executed on the sub main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 106 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. Here, the process in FIG. 3D is a process on the sub main control unit SM side which is executed after resetting when the power to the gaming machine is turned on or the like. That is, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is When receiving → initialize the sub-side RAM, when receiving various information commands → reset the performance-related information at the time of power interruption in the sub-side RAM). After that, the processing shifts to a loop processing for repeatedly executing (e) which is a repetition processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) in the figure, first, in step 2050 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM is described later. A right-handed instruction display control process is executed. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350 (sixth), the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a V winning detection effect display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and executes The repetition processing routine ends.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub main side routine {S2050 (sixth) to S2999} is looped after reset. The process of FIG. 7F is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM sends a command input port ( Check the above-mentioned data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main-side information temporary storage unit SM11b) based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process executed immediately before the interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the right-handing instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (sixth) in FIG. 106. First, in step 2052, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (the display command transmission control processing in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS side), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100). Note that the right-handed instruction display (the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display) is also displayed during the fixed variation time (long fixed variation time) in the time-saving game state.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 2052, in Step 2056, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the small hit game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2057, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is "2AK" (No. This is a small hit symbol in which the two big winning openings C20 are opened only once, and the control operation of the above-described sorting role C23 is designed so that the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C26.) It is determined whether it is not. If Yes in step 2057, the process moves to step 2054. Here, to supplement the processing, if the small hit symbol relating to the currently executing small hit is “2AK”, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed, so that the small hit is displayed for the player. While it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not the game is being executed, if the small hit symbol relating to the currently executed small hit is “4AK” or “7AK”, a right-handed instruction display is displayed. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize whether or not the small hit is executed. Even if the small hit symbol relating to the small hit currently being executed is "4AK", the control operation of the above-mentioned sorting role C23 is designed so that the game ball does not enter the V winning opening C26. In this case, in this case, the small hit symbol relating to the currently executing small hit is “7AK” (by the control operation of the above-mentioned sorting role object C23, the game ball is transferred to the V winning opening C26). Is performed (a process of displaying a right-handed instruction display) as in the case in which the player is designed to enter the ball, so that the player performs a right-handed while expecting that a big hit will be induced. (The game ball is fired toward the second winning port C20). In addition, even when the small hit symbol related to the small hit currently being executed is “2AK”, a right-handed instruction display may be displayed. In such a case, the right-handed instruction related to “2AK” may be displayed. It is desirable to configure the hitting instruction display so that the player has lower visibility (not noticeable) than the right-handing instruction display related to other small hit symbols. In addition, even if the small hit symbol is the same, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be changed depending on the gaming state at the time of the small hit symbol winning. In the non-time shortening game state, when the small hitting game related to "2AK" is won in the non-time shortening game state, the right hitting instruction display is not executed as in the case before the small hitting game starts, and the hitting instruction display is not executed. When the small hit game related to “2AK” is won, the first right-handed instruction display may be executed in the same manner as before starting the small hit game, and during the small hit game related to “4AK” and “7AK”. The right-handed instruction display indicates that when the small hitting game related to “4AK” or “7AK” is won in the non-time shortened game state, the right-handed instruction display is more effective than when the player wins in the time shortened game state. Display with high visibility (conspicuous) for It may form. Note that the visibility is a transmittance or a display area occupancy such as how much the display area SG10 occupies in the entire display area SG10, and is not limited to the visibility. (It is also possible to determine the presence or absence of sound or effect light emission).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2056 or Step 2057, in Step 2058, the right strike instruction display control means SM26-1 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the special game is currently being executed. I do. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for displaying the first right-handing instruction display (in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS Side) and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2058, in step 2062, the right-handing instruction display control means SM26-1 sets a command for erasing the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display (display command transmission in step 2999). In the control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub-control unit SS), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. The first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are displayed at positions where they do not overlap on the effect display device SG. Further, since the situation where the second right-handed instruction display is displayed has a greater loss of profit of the player when the right-handed instruction is not executed than the situation where only the first right-handed instruction display is displayed, The second right-handed instruction display is configured to be easier for the player to visually recognize (conspicuous) than the first right-handed instruction display. In this example, there are two types of right-handing instruction display (first right-handing instruction display and second right-handing instruction display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be provided. In the shortened game state, "Transition to the time shortened game state → fluctuation related to small hits → small hit game start → first opening of second big winning opening C20 → second opening of second big winning opening C20 → small hit Is completed, a first right-handed instruction display (a display mode similar to that of the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the entire series of flow, and (1) the timing of transition to the time-saving gaming state To display a second right-handing instruction display (for example, a display mode of a red arrow pointing to the right which is a display larger than the first right-handing instruction display), and start the fluctuation start timing related to the small hit (or the fluctuation related to the small hit). Pertaining to a certain timing or small hit At the dynamic fixed time start timing, etc., the second right-handed instruction display is erased, and a third right-handed instruction display (for example, a right-pointing giraffe pattern arrow which is larger than the first right-handed instruction display) is displayed. Display mode), the third right-handed instruction display is erased, and the fourth right-handed instruction display (for example, the second main game) is deleted at the timing after the start of the fluctuation related to the small hit and before the start of the small hit game. (A display mode that prompts the launching of a game ball toward the starting port electric accessory B11d) is displayed, and after the first opening of the second winning port C20 and the second opening of the second winning port C20. At the previous timing, the fourth right-handed instruction display is erased, and a fifth right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode that prompts the launch of a game ball toward the second big winning opening C20) is displayed (2). The second right strike at the timing of transition to the time-saving game state An instruction display (for example, a display mode of a rightward red arrow which is a display larger than the first right-handed instruction display) is displayed, and a change start timing related to the small hit (or a certain timing during the change related to the small hit, Alternatively, the second right-handed instruction display is erased at a small fixed hit change fixed time start timing, and the like, and the third right-handed instruction display is displayed (for example, a rightward pointing display that is larger than the first right-handed instruction display). (A display mode of a giraffe pattern arrow) is displayed, and the third right-handed instruction display is erased and the fourth right-handed instruction display ( For example, a display notifying the player that the state of high profit is continuing) is displayed, and after the first opening of the second winning port C20, and the second opening of the second winning port C20. 4th right finger at previous timing The display may be erased and a third right-handed instruction display (for example, a display mode of a right-pointing giraffe pattern arrow which is a display larger than the first right-handed instruction display) may be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 106 of the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2202, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the schematic display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the schematic display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2226 (sixth), the layout display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the game is currently in the time reduction gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (sixth), in step 2228 (sixth), the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change is a symbol related to the first main game symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation. In the case of Yes in step 2228 (sixth), in step 2210, the wiring diagram display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) store the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. With reference to the symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the storage device and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the variation of the symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, the stop related to the main game symbol) If the symbol is a big hit symbol, it is a zoro-eye such as "7 / 7.7", and if the symbol is a loss symbol, a ragged eye such as "1.3.5" and a variation mode {for example, main game If the variation mode of the symbol is short-term variation, non-reach, and if it is long-term variation, determine normal reach, super reach, etc., and temporarily record schematic display related information. Means SM21b (and informational display related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b) temporarily stored in, the process proceeds to step 2216.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2228 (sixth), in step 2230 (sixth), the schematic display content determining means SM21n (and the preview effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) are switched to the main side. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined by referring to the symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the information temporary storage means SM11b and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the symbol variation. The variation mode is determined to be a mode involving pseudo continuous variation (a variation in which the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one variation), and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the preview effect related information temporary storage means) SM24b, the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), and the process goes to step 2216.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of a fluctuation accompanied by pseudo-continuous fluctuation. Here, the “main variation” is a series of processes from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol for the first time, to the final stop display of the decorative symbol (depending on the stop display mode) to the final notification of the success / failure result. The content of the variation, "pseudo variation" is, after the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, but the result of pass / fail is not definitely reported and the variation display of the decorative pattern is newly performed. The "final pseudo variation" is a variation to be started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, then the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to notify the result of the pass / fail and the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started. This is a change that is not allowed. The “decorative symbol changeable period” is a period during which the decorative symbol can be displayed in a variable manner (including the start of a new variable display), and is the same as the period of the “main change”. Further, the “decorative symbol unchangeable period” is a period in which the decorative symbol does not start a new variable display, and is given to the player (because the result of success / failure has already been definitely notified in the stop display mode of the decorative symbol). It is configured to further execute an effect of steadily notifying that a big hit has occurred. Further, as shown in the figure, during the variable display period, the effect relating to the same decorative symbol is executed from the start of the change in the case of the loss and the case of the big hit or the small hit (the temporary stop related to the pseudo change is performed). An effect that is executed twice is executed). In addition, the purpose of performing such pseudo-continuous fluctuation is that even when the game is a non-time-saving game, if the second main game-side hold remains, a further small hit symbol stop display is performed. Because it is an effect aimed at raising the expectation because it is a configuration that can be expected to execute the special game triggered by the trigger, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped for each pseudo variation is For example, if the small hit symbol is scheduled to be stopped and displayed while the remaining second main game side is on hold (or the symbol change), the so-called chance is stopped and displayed (" It is preferable that a special arrangement such as "1, 2, 3" is displayed with a higher probability than when the small hit symbol is not stopped and displayed). In addition, the fluctuation associated with the first main game side may be accompanied by a pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and in such a case, the number of times of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is relatively larger than the fluctuation relating to the second main game side. Or the frequency of execution of the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is small. That is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation on the first main game side occurs only in the non-time-reduced game state (or in the time-reduced game state). Or the frequency of occurrence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation on the first main game side in the non-time shortened game state is the frequency of occurrence of pseudo-continuous fluctuation on the second main game side in the non-time shortened game state. It is desirable to make the configuration lower than that. In addition, in the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo continuous fluctuation related to the second main game side, if the fluctuation is a fluctuation related to a big hit or a small hit, before the elapse of 15 seconds which is the decorative symbol changeable time (for example, the pseudo fluctuation) The decorative symbol may be stopped at the first temporary stop timing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (sixth), in step 2232 (sixth), the schematic display content determining means SM21n (and the notification effect display content determining means SM24n and the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) return to the previous state. An effect mode in which the effect mode during the special game is continuously displayed. The decorative pattern is not displayed or is difficult to visually recognize even when displayed (inconspicuous), and the number of acquired game balls displayed in the previous special game is also continued. With such a configuration, the player decides to recognize that the special game is continuing even though the special game is not being executed, and proceeds to step 2216.

  Next, in step 2216, the design display content determining means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2202, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect presentation control processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (sixth) in FIG. 106. First, at step 2352, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 determines whether or not a V winning detection command has been received from the main side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V winning detection effect (V winning opening C26). Then, "V" is displayed on the effect display device SG, and a command related to the effect of turning on the V lamp V10) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). On the other hand, if No in step 2352, in step 2356, the V winning detection effect display control means SM27 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not a big hit symbol stop command has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, after a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed, the V-prize detection effect display control means SM27 causes the V-prize detection effect (game ball to enter the V-prize opening C26). In this example, a command relating to “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG and an effect of turning on the V lamp V10 is set, and the next processing (step 2400) is performed. Processing). As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the V winning detection effect is also executed at the time of the big hit related to the main game symbol, and the effect consistency with the big hit at the time of the V winning is ensured. In addition, at the time of the big hit related to the main game symbols. Since no game ball has actually entered the V winning opening C26, the V winning detection effect may not be executed. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2356, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 106. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2404, in steps 2406 and 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and displays the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (display is appropriately performed based on the big hit type), and the flow shifts to step 2412. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412 (sixth).

  Next, in step 2412 (sixth), the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of acquired game balls on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side. (It may be appropriately executed as needed based on the game characteristics, the type of big hit, etc.). Note that the number of acquired game balls displayed in this processing is a total from the special game related to the first main game side in the normal game state to the time when all the holdings of the second main game side in the normal game state are exhausted. Of game balls (total number of game balls obtained during the series).

  Next, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2420, in step 2421, the background effect display control means SM23 executes a big hit end display (appropriate display based on the type of the big hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2999). . It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  Next, FIG. 111 is a timing chart relating to the game progress from the first main game big hit winning in the sixth embodiment. In particular, after the first main game big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened game state and the special game is executed twice, in the non-time shortened game state, the operation diagram in the case where the small hit related to the second main game is won. It is. In the operation diagram, the fixed fluctuation time is shown only for a long time (30 seconds in this example), and is not shown for a short time (0.2 seconds in this example). In this operation diagram, it is assumed that the game is switched from left-handed to right-handed after timing 1, and thereafter, the game ball is continuously fired with right-handed shot (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds) thereafter. .

  First, under the situation of the non-time-saving game state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol “7A”, the 4R special game (the first big prize) A special game related to opening of the mouth C10) is executed.

  Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the execution of the special game ends, and the special game related to the first main game side ends, so that the game state becomes the time shortening game state. Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, a long fixed time (30 seconds in this example) of the variable fixed time starts when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol "BK". Is done. In the present embodiment, the maximum number (two) of the second main game suspensions can be almost surely generated by the long fixed fluctuation time.

  Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, the small hitting game related to the stopped small hitting symbol "BK" is started with the end of the fixed fluctuation time. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, during the small hitting game being executed, the game ball is stored in the sorting role object C23 in the second big winning opening C20, and the discharge related to the small hitting game being executed is performed. During the standby time, the sorting role object C23 operates to the second position, thereby entering the V winning opening C26. It should be noted that the above-described V winning detection effect is executed by the ball entering the V winning opening C26. Next, at timing 6 in the drawing, the small hit game ends, and a special game of 15R is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit game.

  Next, at timing 7 in the drawing, the 15R special game ends, the special game is a special game related to the second main game, and the small hitting game is won in the special game. The game state becomes the non-time shortened game state due to the time game state being the time shortened game state. Further, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is started.

  Next, at timing 8 in the drawing, the small hitting game related to the “BK” is started when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the small hitting symbol “BK”. Since the game state is the non-time shortened game state, the fixed fluctuation time related to “BK” is short (0.2 seconds in this example). Next, at timings 9 and 10 in the figure, similarly to the timings 5 and 6 in the figure, the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening C26, the end of the small hitting game, and the start of the special game are executed. You.

  Next, at timing 11 in the figure, the 15R special game ends, the special game is a special game related to the second main game, and the small hitting game is won. The game state becomes the time-reduced game state due to the non-time-reduced game state at the time. Further, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is started.

  With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the small hitting winning probability related to the second main game is set to a high probability (about 1/6 in this example), and the small hitting game is performed. In the middle of the game, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the V winning opening C26 almost surely, and based on the game state at the time of winning the small hit related to the second main game, after the special game related to the small hit is completed. First, when a big hit according to the first main game is won, when the big hit according to the first main game is won, "the small hit according to the second main game → V The special game related to the winning opening C26 "is won, and the second main game hold which has occurred up to the maximum number (4 in this example) in the time shortened gaming state is stored in the V winning opening C26. In the non-time-saving game state after the end of the special game By being of a new elected to the "special game according to the Koatari → V winning hole C26 according to the second main game" is the ability to automatically expected. In other words, each time a small hit is won before all the holdings relating to the second main game remaining in the non-time shortened game state are exhausted, two large hits of the game ball are given to the player. It will be possible to realize novel playability.

  Note that the gaming machine in this example may be configured so that the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that keeps measuring the current time by using a built-in power supply. Here, the real-time clock RTC is a mechanism for measuring time provided on the base of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a built-in power supply (battery) independent of the base and keeps time even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine. , It is possible to supply the current date and time.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, during a special game won in the time reduction game state (or the non-time reduction game state), a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of small hits is held in the second main game hold. When there is a hold scheduled to be won, it is substantially determined that a plurality of special games will be executed after the end of the special game during execution of the special game (small hit in the non-time-saving game state) May be executed to notify the player that the effect has been started. For example, the effect may be notified to the player using a real-time clock RTC. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the feeling that the effect that the appearance frequency is low and the acquisition of a large number of balls is substantially determined is allocated at the current timing. Note that the effect may be executed when a predetermined number (for example, three) or more of small hits are scheduled to be won in the second main game hold, It is preferable that the system is configured not to be executed when there is a hold scheduled to win a jackpot of a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. In addition, the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of special games can be continuously executed when a small hit is won. When there is a hold that becomes a big hit, an effect of notifying the existence of the hold may not be executed.

(Seventh embodiment)
In the configuration as described in the above embodiment, by setting the interval of small hits to be a short period, the speed of increasing the number of game balls by acquiring in the small hit game is faster than the decreasing speed of the number of game balls by launching. It is configured to exceed, and it is assumed that it is a game that can obtain a ball by continuous occurrence of small hit games, but using such an idea, it is possible to further create a novel game that is different from the above-mentioned game is there. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a seventh embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, since the seventh embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is also supplemented that any of the configurations shown in the present embodiment to the sixth embodiment can be applied in the seventh embodiment. Keep it.

  First, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 5 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1216 (seventh) and step 1218 (seventh). That is, in the seventh embodiment, the time reduction game state is not provided as the game state. The configuration in which the variation time of the auxiliary game stop symbol or the auxiliary game symbol differs depending on the game state is deleted from the configuration of (1). In addition, the auxiliary game win / fail lottery is always easy to win regardless of the game state (wins at 300/1024). Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, in the limited frequency state, the number of possessed balls is increased without winning a big hit, that is, A, the number of game balls fired per unit time when the game ball is continuously fired at the second main game start opening B20 is A, and the non-limited when the game ball is continuously fired at the second main game start opening B20. B is the expected prize ball acquisition value per unit time due to the small hit in the frequency state and the state in which the big hit has not been won. If the expected prize ball acquisition value per unit time due to the small hit in the non-performing state is C, then “C> A> B”.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing according to the seventh embodiment. As a feature of the seventh embodiment, a small hit is provided only on the second main game side, and the result of the lottery determination on the second main game side is almost a win (1002/1024). Also, in the non-limited frequency state, the variation time of the second main game symbol is relatively long, and there are a plurality of types of variation time candidates that can be selected. In the state, the variation time of the second main game symbol is relatively short, and only one variation time candidate can be selected. It should be noted that the number of types of selection candidates for the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol can be changed, but the number of types of selection candidates is larger in the non-limited frequency state than in the limited frequency state. It is desirable to configure. Further, in the seventh embodiment, it is not desired to allow the game ball to enter the large winning opening during the small hit game on the second main game side in the non-limited frequency state (the second main game side in the limited frequency state). ), The variation of the second main game symbol in the non-limited frequency state is relatively long, and the number of types of selection candidates is By using a plurality of types, it is possible to configure such that it is difficult for the player to predict the stop timing of the second main game symbol.

  Next, FIG. 114 is an example of the special winning opening opening pattern in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the opening mode of one round of the big hit (the big hit related to 2A / 7A) on the first main game side is “30 seconds open → closed” (full open), while the second main game The opening mode of one round of the big hit on the side (big hit according to 2B) is such that "opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds" is repeated three times. Further, the opening mode of one round per small hit (small hit ends in one round) is “0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed” at the time of the small hit related to “3BK”. At the time of a small hit related to “7BK”, “opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds” is repeated twice (the opening mode of the big winning opening C10 at the time of the small hitting depends on the type of the small hitting pattern. Are configured to be different). With this configuration, one opening and closing of the big winning port C10 at the time of the big hit on the second main game side and one opening and closing of the big winning port C10 at the time of the small hit (on the second main game side) are realized. The doors are opened and closed at the same and equal intervals, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won a big hit or a small hit. In addition, in both the big hit and the small hit, when 10 game balls enter the special winning opening C10 during the execution of one round, the running round is ended. At the time of the game big hit (big hit related to 7B) and the small hit (small hit related to 3BK / 7BK), the opening time of the big winning opening C10 is 0.2 second, so that the game ball is turned into the big winning opening. The open round (small hit) ends after the opening time of one round elapses before 10 balls enter the C10. The present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the opening mode of the special winning opening C10 in one round may be changed by entering a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls before the opening time ends. May be designed so as to end the special winning opening C10. Further, the opening mode of the special winning opening C10 in a certain round with a big hit is an opening mode in which “opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds” is repeated 50 times, and a predetermined number of game balls are provided in the special winning opening C10. (For example, 10 balls) The configuration may be such that the opening time of the special winning opening C10 almost does not end before entering the ball. In the case of such a configuration, the number of times “0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed” is executed is notified to the player before the first opening of the special winning opening C10 in the round is started. Alternatively, more specifically, the number of times of the notification “opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds” may be a number other than the number of times actually executed. Specifically, before the first opening of the special winning opening C10 in the round is started, "10 times opening!" Is notified, and then timing before the opening of 10 times ends (for example, 5 times opening). At the timing), an effect (additional effect) such as “+10 times!” May be made to appear (actually, 50 times open, but the actual number of open times is until 10 balls enter the special winning opening C10). , The number of open times and additional effects to be notified in consideration of the actual progress of the round, the number of incoming balls, etc.). Further, after three times, an ambiguous display that does not specify the number of times, such as “extending!”, May be executed. As the opening mode of the special winning opening C10, a round in which the above-mentioned “opening for 0.2 seconds → closing for 0.2 seconds” is repeated a plurality of times and a round opening for “opening for 30 seconds → closed” are performed. There may be provided a big hit in which a round that is in an open mode (so-called full open) is mixed. For example, in the first R, an open mode in which “0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed” is repeated three times In the second and subsequent Rs, a jackpot is provided so as to provide an opening mode of “open for 30 seconds → closed”, and in the fourth R, an opening mode for repeating “opening for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.2 seconds” three times is used. In the round, a big hit may be provided such that the opening mode is “30 seconds open → closed”.

  Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (seventh) of the seventh embodiment. First, in step 1753-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is the probability-change big-hit symbol (the big-hit symbol that will shift to the probability-variation gaming state after the end). In this example, it is determined whether 7A or 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1753-1 In step 1752-2, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1753-3, the specific game control means MP50 sets a certain number of times (in this example, 50 times) to the probability change counter MP51c. Next, in step 1753-4, the specific game control means MP50 sets a limited frequency state as a limited frequency type (in the seventh embodiment, there is only one limited frequency state), and performs the following processing ( The processing shifts to step 1800). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1753-1, at Step 17553-5, the specific game control means MP50 clears the set limited frequency type (becomes a non-limited frequency state), and performs the next process (Step 1800). Processing).

  With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to increase the number of payouts by successive small hits, and in the probability variation gaming state, One opening and closing of the big winning opening C10 at the time of the big hit on the main game side and one opening and closing of the big winning opening C10 at the time of the small hit (on the second main game side) are opened and closed at the same and equal intervals. It is difficult for the player to determine whether the player has won a big hit or a small hit, so he has a sense of expectation as to how long the probability-variable gaming state (a state of high profit for the player) will continue. It will be possible to create a novel game that continues.

  In the seventh embodiment, a 2R probability-variable jackpot (a jackpot in which the number of execution rounds is 2R and which shifts to a probability-variable gaming state after the end) is provided as a jackpot on the second main game side. By making the opening mode the same as when the small hits are consecutively won, it is determined whether the small hit has been won or the big hit has been won, in other words, whether the number of probable changes has not been reset or whether the number of probable changes has been reset. Alternatively, it may be configured to be more difficult to determine from the viewpoint of the player.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, a special area is provided in a special winning opening, and a game ball enters the specific area during a special game, so that the game shifts to a probability varying game state after the end of the special game. (A so-called Tamasu machine).

(Modification Example 1 from Seventh Embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, the gaming property is such that the payout can be obtained by the continuous occurrence of the small hitting game. However, by using such an idea, the structure of the gaming machine which facilitates the design of the payout rate and It is possible to Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example from the seventh embodiment, and only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, since the first modification example from the seventh embodiment is also a modification example based on the seventh embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the present embodiment to the seventh embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment. It is also supplemented that the present invention can be applied in the first modification.

  First, FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (seventh) of the first modification example from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 1753-15 (seventh variation 1) to step 1753-18 (seventh variation 1), that is, the specific game in step 1753-15 (seventh variation 1) The control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the ended special game is a special game won in the normal game state (non-probability changing game state). In the case of Yes in step 1753-15 (seventh first variant), the process proceeds to step 1753-1; in the case of No, in step 1753-16 (seventh first variant), the specific game control means Medium counter MP54c is a counter for counting the number of times a special game has been won continuously in a high profit situation. In this example, the special game is continuously performed in a game state other than the non-probability variable game state. The number of wins (in this example, the number of times a special game has been won continuously in the probability-variable game state because the time reduction game state is not provided) is incremented by 1 to the counter value. Next, in step 1753-17 (seventh variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the extended game counter MP54c, and the counter value is changed to the extended game end value (to a gaming state other than the non-probability variable gaming state). When the number of consecutive wins for the special game reaches the end value of the extended game, the game shifts to the non-probability changing game state, and in this example, it is 5. It is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of special games continuously executed with high profit is six). If Yes in Step 1753-17 (Seventh Variation 1), in Step 1753-18 (Seventh Variation 1), the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the extended game counter MP54c to zero, and performs the next process ( The processing shifts to step 1800). In the case of No at step 1753-17 (seventh variation 1), the flow shifts to step 1753-1. In the first modification of the seventh embodiment, the time reduction game state is not provided. However, in the case of a gaming machine in which the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are provided as the game state, a continuous The in-sea counter MP54c may be configured to count the number of times the special game has been consecutively won in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state.

  With the above-described configuration, the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification example from the seventh embodiment has a gaming characteristic in which a payout can be obtained by successive occurrences of small hitting games, as in the seventh embodiment, and a probability variation. By providing an upper limit (so-called limiter) to the number of big hits that can be consecutively won in the gaming state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which unexpected balls exceeding the design value are produced, and the gaming machine is easy to design. can do.

(Modification Example 2 from Seventh Embodiment)
The configuration as described in the seventh embodiment and the first modification example from the seventh embodiment is such that it is possible to acquire a payout by successive occurrences of small hitting games. By providing a shortened gaming state, a novel gaming ability different from the above-mentioned gaming ability can be further created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the seventh embodiment, and only the points different from the first modification from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since Modification Example 2 from the seventh embodiment is also a modification example based on the seventh embodiment, any of the configurations shown in Modification Example 1 from the present embodiment to the seventh embodiment will It is also supplemented that the present invention is applicable in the second modification example from the seventh embodiment.

  First, FIG. 117 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification example of the seventh embodiment. In the second modification example from the seventh embodiment, two first main game starting ports are provided, and the first main game starting port (2) A10-2 is provided with a first main game starting port electric accessory A11d. Is provided. Further, when the player hits left, it is easy to enter the first main game start port (1) A10-1 and the first main game start port (2) A10-2, and the second main game start port B10 is used. It is difficult to enter the ball, and when hit right, it is difficult to enter the first main game start port (1) A10-1 and the first main game start port (2) A10-2, and the second main game start port (2) A10-2. It is easy to enter the main game start port B10.

  Next, FIG. 118 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing according to the second modification example from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are that the number of execution rounds of all jackpots is 8R and that the time reduction game state is provided, so that the time reduction game state is determined when the variation mode of the first main game symbol is determined. Is different depending on whether or not the table is selected. Further, in the second modification from the seventh embodiment, as shown in the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, in the limited frequency state, the number of possessed balls increases without winning a big hit. That is, in the non-time shortened game state, the number of game balls fired per unit time when the game balls are continuously fired at the second main game start port B20 is A, and the second main game start port B20 In the case where the game ball is continuously fired in the non-limited frequency state and the state in which the big hit has not been won, the expected prize ball acquisition value per unit time due to the small hit is B, and the game ball is fired at the second main game start opening B20 Assuming that C is the expected prize ball acquisition value per unit time due to the small hit in the limited frequency state and the state in which the big hit has not been won in the case where the game is continued, “C> A> B”.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (seventh) in FIG. 15 of the second modification from the seventh embodiment. Steps 1753-19 (seventh second modification), steps 1753-20 (seventh second modification), step 3050 (seventh second modification), and step 3100 (first modification) 7th variation 2), that is, in step 1753-19 (seventh variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the completed special game is in the normal game state ( It is determined whether or not the special game has been won in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time reduction game state. If Yes in Step 1753-19 (Seventh Modification 2), in Step 1753-20 (Seventh Modification 2), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and It is determined whether or not the game is a special game won in the non-probability changing game state. If Yes in Step 1753-20 (Seventh Variation 2), in Step 3050 (Seventh Variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 executes a non-probable variation game state determination process, which will be described later. The processing shifts to step 1800). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1753-20 (Seventh Modification 2), at Step 3100 (Seventh Modification 2), the specific game control means MP50 executes a later-described probable change-time game state determination process, and Then, the processing shifts to (processing of step 1800). If the determination in Step 1753-19 (Seventh Modification 2) is No, the process shifts to Step 1753-16 (Seventh Modification 2). As described above, in the modification example 2 from the seventh embodiment, the number of consecutively winning the special game in the game state other than the normal game state, that is, in the high profit game state is the extended game end value (this example). (5 times), the game state after the end of the special game reached is shifted to the normal game state (non-probability changing game state and non-time shortening game state) (special game execution). Sometimes the game state is the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, and since the main game probable change flag and the main game time reduction flag are not turned on in the process of FIG. The game state after the game ends is the normal game state).

  Next, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the non-probable variation game state determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3050 (Seventh Variation 2) in FIG. 119 of Modification Example 2 from the Seventh Embodiment. First, at step 3052, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the current stop symbol is the first main game big hit symbol (3A / 5A in this example). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game certainty change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3056, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3058, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (in this example, 50 times). Next, in step 3060, the specific game control means MP50 clears the set limited frequency state, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3052, that is, when the big hit of the first main game side (in this example, the big hit related to the first main game big hit symbol or the first main game small hit symbol in this example) is finished, step 3062 Then, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3064, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency state as the limited frequency type, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the game state determination process at the time of a probability change, according to the subroutine of step 3100 (seventh variation 2) in FIG. 119 of the second modification from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 3102, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is the first main game short time big hit symbol (the probability variation among the first main game big hit symbols). It is a big hit symbol that shifts to the time-reduced game state after the big hit stopped in the gaming state. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A). In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game certainty change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3106, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3108, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (in this example, 50 times). Next, in step 3110, the specific game control means MP50 clears the set limited frequency state, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800).

  On the other hand, if No in step 3102, that is, if the big hit on the second main game side (in this example, the big hit with the second main game big hit symbol or the second main game small hit symbol) is finished, step 3112 Then, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3114, the specific game control means MP50 sets the limited frequency state as the limited frequency type, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  As described above, in the modification example 2 from the seventh embodiment, after the end of the special game won in the normal game state, if the special game is the special game of the first main game side, the big hit symbol Regardless of this, while the game is shifted to the probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state, after the special game that has been won in the probability-variable game state (probability-variable game state and the time-reduced game state), the special game is the first primary game In the case of a special game relating to the game-time short-hit jackpot symbol (in this example, 3A), the game shifts to the probability-variable gaming state and the time-reduction game state, and the first main game time-saving jackpot symbol (in this example, 3A). In the case of a special game other than the above, it is configured to shift to the probability varying game state and the non-time shortening game state. Further, after the end of the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol, a transition is made to a non-time shortened game state (probability changing game state and non-time shortened game state) regardless of the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped. Have been.

  In the modification example 2 from the seventh embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit is determined based on the type of the big hit symbol that has triggered the big hit and the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped. The configuration is not limited, and a specific area is provided in the special winning opening, and a game state after the end of the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area within the valid period of the specific area during the big hit. May be. Even in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured to determine whether or not to shift to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, depending on the type of the big hit symbol that triggered the big hit and the game state when the big hit symbol is stopped. Good.

  With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the seventh embodiment, in addition to the gaming ability to obtain a payout by successive occurrence of small hitting games, a time-saving gaming state is provided. In addition, there are three gaming states, a probability varying gaming state and a time shortening gaming state, a probability varying gaming state, a non-time reducing gaming state, a non-probability varying gaming state, and a time reducing gaming state, which are gaming states in which the player has a higher profit. By providing the upper limit number (limiter) that can be continuously won in a big hit over the state, it becomes possible to fit in the payout according to the design value more than the above-described configuration, and various game states. , A game state can be constructed for the player, and a variety of playability can be provided.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the above-described embodiment, the gaming ability in which a payout can be obtained by successive occurrence of small hit games has been described in detail. In a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by entering a ball, a novel gaming ability different from the gaming ability described above can be further created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as an eighth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, the eighth embodiment is also a modification based on Modification 2 from the present embodiment to the seventh embodiment, so that any of the above-described configurations can be applied to the eighth embodiment. I will add it.

  First, FIG. 122 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. First, the special winning opening V16 is a special winning opening that can be opened by winning a small hit. As a specific configuration, the special winning opening V16 guides the game ball to one of the special winning opening C26 and the normal region V13 provided in the special winning opening V16 and the normal winning region C13. The guiding device V15, the V winning opening ball detection device C26s for detecting the entering of a game ball into the V winning opening C26, and the normal region entering for detecting the entering of the game ball into the normal region V13. It includes a detection device V14s, a splash accessory V11d, and a special winning opening ball detection device V11s for detecting the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening V16. Only the game balls that have won when the splash accessory V11d is in the open state (the position indicated by the dotted line in the drawing) can reach each component installed inside the above-mentioned special winning opening V16. When the accessory V11d is in the closed state (the position shown by the solid line in the figure), it is configured to be unreachable. Here, the special winning opening V16 is provided with a guiding device V15 having one valve member, and when the splash accessory V11d is in a closed state, the valve member in the guiding device V15 is in a lowered state (shown by a solid line in the figure). Position). On the other hand, in response to the opening of the fly accessory V11d, the valve member of the guidance device V15 is displaced to the ascending state (the position indicated by the broken line in the drawing), and from the open state of the fly accessory V11d. After a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, one second), the state is changed to the lower state again. Here, when the valve member of the guiding device V15 is in the ascending state, the flowing game balls are guided to the V winning opening C26, while in the descending state, the flowing game balls are guided to the normal region V13. You. That is, it is configured such that only the game balls that have entered the special winning opening V16 immediately after the splash accessory V11d is opened are given an opportunity to enter the V winning opening C26. In the eighth embodiment, the displacement [in the eighth embodiment, the rotation is performed with reference to the axis, but the displacement is in the vertical direction, the displacement is in the horizontal direction, and the displacement is in the front-rear direction (for example, A mode in which a plate-shaped member such as a tongue comes out of or retracts from the game area D30) and a mode in which it is rotationally displaced {for example, a circular member provided with a hole is revolved (eg, counterclockwise) so that a hole is formed. A mode in which a game ball is received and guided downstream at a predetermined position (for example, 2 o'clock), an arbitrary combination of two or more of these is provided. A configuration may be used (for example, a so-called “crown” mode in which the game ball is distributed to one of a plurality of holes depending on the rolling mode). Further, in the eighth embodiment, the position of the V winning port C26 is fixed, but it may be movable. For example, the V winning opening C26 may be a movable member. A specific area is provided in the section, and when a game ball flows down at a predetermined position (for example, at 12 o'clock), the ball enters the V winning opening. In the eighth embodiment, two second main game start ports are provided (second main game start port (1) B10-1, second main game start port (2) B10-2). Further, the second main game start port (2) B10-2 is not provided with an electric accessory, and the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port (2) B10 in the non-time shortening game state. -2 allows game balls to enter.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, a parallel lottery can be executed, and a large hit is executed by entering a V winning port C26 during a small hit game, thereby having a time-saving gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a main flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1950 (eighth), that is, after executing the small hitting game control process in step 1800, in step 1950 (eighth), the main control board M The entry judgment processing is executed, and the routine goes to Step 1997. In the eighth embodiment, since the second main game starting port (2) B10-2 can easily enter a ball even during a normal game (in a non-probability changing game state and in a non-time shortening game state). The number of prize balls in the second main game start port is one.

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 123 of the eighth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1326-1 (eighth), that is, if the ball enters the second main game starting port B10 in step 1312, the second main game start port B10 is entered in step 1326-1 (eighth). The game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and determines whether the second main game symbol is not fluctuating. If Yes in step 1326-1 (eighth), the process proceeds to step 1328, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). As described above, in the eighth embodiment, there is no hold on the second main game side (a random number can be stored, but another random number cannot be stored until the stored random number is digested). With such a configuration, game balls enter the second main game start port (1) B10-1 or the second main game start port (2) B10-2 in a situation where the second main game symbol is changing. Even so, the random number relating to the incoming ball is not stored.

  As an error execution mode relating to a configuration in which there is no hold on the second main game side as in the eighth embodiment, the second main game is executed in a non-time shortened game state and during a big hit and a small hit. If the ball enters the starting port, an error is determined. If an error occurs, the lighting of the frame decoration LED and the reproduction of the error notification sound are executed. The error notification is terminated 300 seconds after the power is turned on or the abnormality occurs. In addition, after the error is detected, the error is detected again before the first main game symbol changes five times, or the ball enters the V winning opening C26 before the first main game symbol changes, or An error notification may be executed when the player enters the V winning port C26 before the standby demonstration screen is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing according to the eighth embodiment. As a feature of the eighth embodiment, two types of a first main game big hit symbol, a second main game big hit symbol, and a second main game small hit symbol are provided. It is configured to win almost small hits. In addition, since the first main game side is not provided with a small hit, the second main game side is configured to have a higher rate of small hits than the first main game side. It is to be noted that when the small hit of the second main game side is won, it becomes easy to enter the V winning opening C26 during the small hit, and after the end of the small hit, the big hit is almost executed. In the eighth embodiment, there are a first limited frequency state and a second limited frequency state as limited frequency types, and in a situation where the first limited frequency state is set (also referred to as a first limited frequency state). The variation time of the second main game symbol is relatively short, while the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is relatively long in a situation where the second limited frequency state is set. ing. In the first limited frequency state, only one short-time fluctuating time is selected in the first limited frequency state, regardless of the result of the lottery. In the second limited frequency state, (1) big hit In this case, only one variation time is selected in the same manner as the first limitation frequency, and only the variation time that is longer than the first limitation frequency and shorter than the loss and small hit is (2) In the case of a loss and a small hit, a plurality of types are all selected from long-term fluctuation times. That is, in the first limited frequency state, the number of change time selection candidates of the second main game symbol is smaller than in the second limited frequency state. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of selection candidates in the case of a big hit in the second limited frequency state, and the first main game side is also different from the second limited frequency state in the first limited frequency state, similarly to the second main game side. Also, the configuration may be such that the selection candidates of the fluctuation time are reduced. Further, in the eighth embodiment, after the right hit is performed in the second limited frequency state and one ball is entered in the second main game symbol, the small hit game related to the second main game small hit symbol stop is executed. In order to prevent a capture strategy in which the game is interrupted until the small hit starts and the game ball is thrown into the special winning opening, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the second limited frequency state is reduced. A plurality of types of selection candidates are provided, and are configured so that the fluctuation stop timing is not estimated. In addition, since the selection candidates of the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol are all long time, the right hitting is continuously performed in the second limited frequency state, and the small winning is started at the timing when the small hit starts. It is configured so that the game balls are made to enter and the payout is reduced (the probability of entering the V winning opening per small hit is increased to 1/10 by increasing the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol and increasing the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol). Or the auxiliary game symbol winning rate may be reduced to about 1/4, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 126 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 123 of the eighth embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1544 (eighth) and step 1546 (eighth), that is, after the auxiliary game time reduction flag is turned off in step 1512, the specific game is executed in step 1544 (eighth). The control unit MP50 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in Step 1546 (eighth), the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (777 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and performs the next processing (Step 1550). Processing).

  Next, FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (eighth) of the eighth embodiment. First, at step 1797-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and ends the special game related to the first main game symbol (the special game related to the first main game big hit symbol). It is determined whether it is later. In the case of Yes in step 1797-1, in step 1797-2, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the first big hit symbol without time saving (the first main game big hit symbol, It is a big hit symbol that shifts to the non-time shortening game state after the big hit symbol is completed. In this example, it is determined whether or not the special game according to 2A) is completed. In the case of Yes at Step 1797-2, at Step 1797-3, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, at step 1797-4, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (777 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to step 1797-8.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1797-2, in other words, the first big hit symbol with time reduction (the first main game big hit symbol, and the big hit symbol that shifts to the time reduction game state after the end of the big hit related to the big hit symbol) In this example, if the special game according to 7A) has been completed, in step 1797-5, the specific game control means MP50 sets the main game time reduction in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn on the flag. Next, in step 1797-6, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1797-7, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1797-8. Note that, also in the case of No at step 1797-1, the processing shifts to step 1797-8.

  Next, in step 1797-8, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and executes the special game related to the current second main game symbol (the special game related to the second main game big hit symbol). It is determined whether or not after the end of the second main game small hit symbol (special game). In the case of Yes at step 1797-8, at step 1797-9, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the second special game without current time saving (non-time-saving game state after the end of the big hit) In this example, it is determined whether or not after the end of the special game related to 2B and the special game triggered by 2BK). In the case of Yes at Step 1797-9, at Step 1797-10, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 1797-11, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (777 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and performs the next process (the process in step 1800). ).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1797-9, in other words, it is a second special game with a time reduction (a big hit on the second main game side, which shifts to a time reduction game state after the end of the big hit, and in this example, 7B If the special game and the special game triggered by 7BK have been completed, in step 1797-12, the specific game control means MP50 sets the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Turn on. Next, in step 1797-13, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1797-14, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). I do. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1797-8, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800). In the eighth embodiment, the symbol drawing lottery ratio at the time of the big hit on the first main game side (the same applies to the lottery rate at the time of the big hit triggered by the small hit). On the other hand, the symbol lottery ratio at the time of the big hit on the second main game side (similarly, the lottery ratio at the time of the big hit at the time of the small hit) is "Big hit symbol with time reduction: no big hit symbol without time saving = 7: 3" In the non-time reduction game state and the second limited frequency state, the game proceeds on the first main game side by left-handing, and the non-time reduction game state, the first limited frequency state, and the time reduction game state In, because the game proceeds on the second main game side by right-handed, the case where the big hit is won in the time shortened game state is relatively compared to the case where the big hit is won in the non-time shortened game state. After the end of the jackpot It has become easy to migrate to the time shortened game. Note that the transition of the game state after the end of the big hit is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the transition tendency of the game state after the end of the big hit may be changed or executed depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The transition tendency of the game state after the end of the big hit differs depending on whether the big hit is a big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol or a big hit triggered by the entry into the V winning opening C26 during the small hit. Is also good.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the count value of the limited frequency counter MP53c becomes 0, similarly to the processing of FIG. 13, the limited frequency set from the second limited frequency state to the first limited frequency state. The state is configured to transit. With this configuration, the second limited frequency state (a limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) is set without shifting to the time reduction game state after the end of the special game. In the case or after the end of the special game, the game shifts to the time reduction game state, but the special game cannot be won during the time reduction game state, and the symbol change of the predetermined number of times ends, and the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state and the second limitation. When the frequency state (limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) is set, the timing at which the second limited frequency state (limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) is set (In this example, 777 times) et main game symbols a predetermined number of times is (advantageously limited frequency state for the player) is set first limit frequency state by ending change has become a remedy to the player. In addition, the value set in the limited frequency counter MP53c when shifting to the second limited frequency state is 777 times, whereas the value set in the limited frequency counter MP53c when shifting to the first limited frequency state is This is 65535 times, and the number of stays in the first limited frequency state is larger than the number of stays in the second limited frequency state.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment, as a configuration in which a payout is obtained using a small hit, a game ball enters the V winning opening in the large winning opening, and the big hit is achieved. Is executed, a predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol are executed after the end of the special game even in a state disadvantageous to the player (the non-time shortened game state and the second limited frequency state). In this manner, the first limited frequency state is set, and in the first limited frequency state, the fluctuation time of the second main game start port is short, and the result of the success / failure lottery on the second main game side is almost zero. As it is a small hit, as soon as the state shifts to the first limited frequency state, the small hit is won (with almost one change), and the special game is triggered by the game ball entering the V winning opening during the small hit. Will be implemented and relief for the player With location is provided, so that the big-hit itself not to suppress the reduction of the ball out by the remedies it may be awarded to a player.

  Although not shown, in the eighth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed as in the sixth embodiment, and during a special game, a time-saving game state and a first limited frequency state are set. Is configured to display a right-handed instruction display. In the time reduction game state and the first limited frequency state, the game is configured to proceed right-handed. In addition, the timing of executing the right-handed instruction display may be changed, and it is preferable that the right-handed instruction display is executed in a state of high profit for the player when the special game or the small hit game is not performed. In addition, a probability variation game state is provided as a game state, and the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state become a state of high profit for the player. In the case where the game is configured to proceed, the right-handed instruction display may be displayed in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state. In this example, the state that is highly profitable for the player includes, for example, a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, a non-probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state, There are a probability varying game state, a time reduction game state, a first limited frequency state, and the like. In addition, in the configuration of the present example including the above-described embodiment, when displaying the right-handing instruction display, it is determined how to display the first right-handing instruction display or the second right-handing instruction display. For example, the first right-handed instruction display may be performed in the probability varying game state and the non-time shortened gaming state, and the second right-handed instruction display may be performed in the probability varying gaming state and the time shortened gaming state. You may comprise.

  In the eighth embodiment, a state in which the player has a high profit, that is, a special game execution, a small hitting game execution, a time reduction game state, or a first limited frequency state. During a continuous period, an external terminal signal indicating that the high profit state continues may be output.

(Modification Example 1 from Eighth Embodiment)
The configuration as described in the eighth embodiment is a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by a game ball entering a V winning opening in a big winning opening as a configuration for acquiring a payout using a small hit. In a state that is disadvantageous to the player (the non-time-saving game state and the second limited frequency state), a predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol are executed after the end of the special game. Although the rescue procedure is provided, a novel game characteristic different from the above-described game characteristic can be further created by using such an idea. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example from the eighth embodiment, and only the points different from the eighth embodiment will be described below in detail. Further, Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment is also a modified example based on the eighth embodiment, and therefore any of the configurations shown in the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment. It is also supplemented that the present invention can be applied in the first modification.

  First, FIG. 128 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display process according to Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are that the small hitting win rate in the win / fail lottery of the second main game side is about ４, and that “2A: 7A = 900: 124” and “2B: 7B = 100: 924 "and" 2BK: 7BK = 100: 924 ". Also, the number of execution rounds per jackpot has been changed, but this is merely an example, and there is no problem if it is changed. Further, in the first modification example from the eighth embodiment, the time reduction game state is not provided.

  Next, FIG. 129 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (Eighth Modification 1) of Modification Example 1 from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1795-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and selects the current advantageous special game (the special game in which the first limited frequency state is set after the end of the big hit). In this example, it is determined whether or not the special game relating to 7A and 7B and the special game triggered by 7BK) have been completed. If Yes in step 1795-1, in step 1795-2, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first limited frequency state (limited frequency state advantageous to the player) as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 1795-3, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first specific number (in this example, 65535 times) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and performs the next process (the process in step 1800). ). On the other hand, if No in step 1795-1, in other words, the current disadvantageous special game (a special game in which the second limited frequency state is set after the end of the big hit, in this example, the special game related to 2A / 2B) In the case where the special game control means MP50 has ended after the end of the special game with 2BK, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency state (limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) as the limited frequency type in step 1795-4. I do. Next, in step 1795-5, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (888 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and performs the next process (the process in step 1800). ). Thus, in the first modification example from the eighth embodiment, the limited frequency type set after the end of the special game includes the first limited frequency state advantageous to the player and the second limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player. In the case where a big hit has occurred on the first main game side, "the rate at which the first limited frequency state is set after the big hit is completed: the rate at which the second limited frequency state is set after the big hit is finished: 1: 9" In the case of a big hit on the second main game side, "the ratio at which the first limited frequency state is set after the end of the big hit: the ratio at which the second limited frequency state is set after the end of the big hit ≒ 9: 1". Therefore, it is easier to shift to the first limited frequency state after the end of the big hit, when the big hit is made on the second main game side than when the big hit is made on the first main gaming side.

  With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the eighth embodiment, the game ball enters the V winning opening in the large winning opening as a configuration in which a payout is obtained using a small hit. A predetermined number of main game symbols after the end of the special game, even in a state where the player hits a ball and a big hit is executed, even in a state disadvantageous to the player (non-time-saving game state and second limited frequency state). Is executed to provide a remedy to the player, and the limited frequency state set after the end of the big hit differs depending on the type of the big hit symbol. After the end, the limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player is likely to be set (a jackpot symbol in which the limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player is set is likely to be selected), while the big hit on the second main game side is a large hit. By configuring so that the limited frequency state advantageous to the player is likely to be set after the end (the big hit symbol in which the limited frequency state advantageous to the player is set is easily selected), the limited frequency state advantageous to the player is reduced. It is possible to have a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game will increase.

(Example 2 of change from the eighth embodiment)
In the configuration described in the eighth embodiment and the first modification example from the eighth embodiment, the game ball enters the V winning opening in the large winning opening as a configuration in which a payout is obtained using a small hit. In a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed, even in a state disadvantageous to the player (a non-time shortened gaming state and a second limited frequency state), a predetermined number of fluctuations of the main gaming symbol from the end of the special game are performed. Although the configuration is such that a remedy for the player is provided by being executed, a novel game characteristic different from the above-described game characteristics can be further created by using such an idea. Thus, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the eighth embodiment, and only the points different from the eighth embodiment will be described below in detail. Further, since Modification 2 from the eighth embodiment is also a modification based on the eighth embodiment, any of the configurations shown in Modification 1 from the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment is the same as the first modification. It is also supplemented that the present invention is applicable in Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 130 is a table configuration diagram used in the main game symbol display processing according to Modification Example 2 from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are that the small hitting win rate in the winning / non-winning lottery of the second main game side is about 1/3, the first main game big hit symbol, the second main game big hit symbol, the second There are three types of main game small hit symbols, and in the symbol lottery, "2A: 3A: 7A = 500: 450: 74", "2B: 3B: 7B = 200: 600: 224", "2BK: 3BK: 7BK = 200: 600: 224 ". Also, the number of execution rounds per jackpot has been changed, but this is merely an example, and there is no problem if it is changed.

  Next, FIG. 131 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (eighth) of the second modification example from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are Step 3250 (Eighth Modification 2) and Step 3300 (Eighth Modification 2), that is, after the end of the special game related to the first main game side in Step 1797-1. In this case, in step 3250 (eighth variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 executes a first main game post-game state determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1800). . On the other hand, if the special game related to the second main game has been completed in step 1797-1, in step 3300 (eighth variation 2), the specific game control means MP50 determines whether the second main game will be executed after the second main game. The game state determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 132 is a flowchart of the first main game post-game state determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3250 (eighth modification 2) in FIG. 131 of the second modification example from the eighth embodiment. In addition, the stop symbol of the main game symbol at the time of executing this processing is the first main game symbol (the first main game big hit symbol). First, in step 3252, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is a time-saving big hit symbol (the first main game symbol is changed to a time-saving game state after the end of the big hit). It is a big hit symbol to be shifted, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3A). In the case of Yes in step 3252, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b in step 3254. Next, in step 3256, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 3258, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3252, at Step 3260, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current stop symbol is a time-saving advantageous big hit symbol (of the first main game symbol). It is a big hit symbol that shifts to the non-time shortening game state after the big hit end, and the first limited frequency state is set. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 7A). If Yes in step 3260, in step 3262, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first limited frequency state (limited frequency state advantageous to the player) as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3264, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first specific number (32 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Transition.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3260, in other words, the current stop symbol is a non-time-saving disadvantageous big hit symbol (the first main game symbol shifts to the non-time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, and the second limited frequency state is If the big hit symbol to be set is 2A) in this example, in step 3266, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second limited frequency state as the limited frequency type (the limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player). ) Is set. Next, in step 3268, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (777 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 133 is a flowchart of the second main game state determination process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (eighth modification 2) in FIG. 131 of the second modification from the eighth embodiment. In addition, the stop symbol of the main game symbol at the time of executing this processing is a second main game symbol (a second main game big hit symbol or a second main game small hit symbol). First, in step 3302, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and refers to a special game with a current time reduction (a special game to be shifted to a time reduction game state after the end of the big hit. In the example, it is determined whether or not the special game related to 3B and the special game triggered by 3BK) have ended. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3306, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 3308, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3302, in step 3310, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the current special time-limited advantageous special game (the first limited frequency is set after the end of the big hit). In this example, it is determined whether or not the special game relating to 7B and the special game triggered by 7BK have been completed. If Yes in Step 3310, in Step 3312, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first limited frequency state (limited frequency state advantageous to the player) as the limited frequency type. Next, in Step 3314, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first specific number (32 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1800). Transition.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3310, at Step 3316, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not after the end of the special game won in the non-time shortening game state. Is determined. If Yes in step 3316, in step 3318, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 3320, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 3322, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  On the other hand, if No in step 3316, in step 3324, the specific game control means MP50 sets a second limited frequency state (a limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 3326, the specific game control means MP50 sets the second specific number (777 times in this example) to the limited frequency counter MP53c as the limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Transition.

  As described above, in the second modification example from the eighth embodiment, in the time reduction game state, if a big hit occurs on the first main game side, the second limited frequency state (the limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player) ), There is a possibility that if there is a big hit on the second main game side, there is no possibility of shifting to the second limited frequency state (limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player). I have. In addition, in the time shortened game state, the game proceeds only on the second main game side by right-handed. Therefore, when a big hit is won in the time shortened game state, the game is substantially completed after the big hit is completed. It is configured not to shift to a disadvantageous state (second limited frequency state) for the user. In addition, the big hit of the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state (the big hit related to the second main game big hit symbol or the second main game small hit symbol in the probability changing game state and the non-time shortening game state). In some cases, there is no possibility of transition to the second limited frequency state (limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player).

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification example from the eighth embodiment, as a configuration for acquiring a payout using a small hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening in the large winning opening. A predetermined number of main game symbols after the end of the special game, even in a state where the player hits a ball and a big hit is executed, even in a state disadvantageous to the player (non-time-saving game state and second limited frequency state). Is executed so that rescue measures are provided to the player, so that the game state after the end of the big hit and / or the limited frequency state to be set differs depending on the type of the big hit symbol and the playing state at the time of the big hit. In the case of shifting to the first limited frequency state after the end of the big hit, the first limited frequency state or the time-reduced game state (both advantageous to the player) after the end of the big hit in the first limited frequency state Will be migrated to the state), favorable conditions at least twice for the player becomes to be able to create a novel game of such is guaranteed.

(Example 3 of change from the eighth embodiment)
The configuration as described in the eighth embodiment is a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by a game ball entering a V winning opening in a big winning opening as a configuration for acquiring a payout using a small hit. In a state that is disadvantageous to the player (the non-time-saving game state and the second limited frequency state), a predetermined number of changes of the main game symbol are executed after the end of the special game. Although the rescue procedure is provided, the limited frequency state is changed to change the profit rate for the player, and a novel game property different from the above-described game property can be further created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a third modification example of the eighth embodiment, and only the changes from the eighth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since the third modification from the eighth embodiment is also a modification based on the eighth embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the second modification from the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment is the same as the third modification. It is also supplemented that the third embodiment is applicable to the third modification from the eighth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 134 is a flowchart of the second main game state determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3300 (Eighth Modification 2) in FIG. 48 of Modification 3 from the eighth embodiment. In the third modified example from the eighth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be executable as in the fourth embodiment, the description of this drawing will detail only the differences from the fourth embodiment. . The difference from the fourth embodiment is step 3350 (eighth variation 3), that is, after turning on the condition device operation flag in step 1432 or after turning on the small hit flag in step 1436. In step 3350 (eighth modification 3), the game content determining means MN executes the other main game variation control process described later, and proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 135 is a table configuration diagram used in a main game symbol display process according to a third modification example of the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are that the small hitting winning rate in the winning / non-winning lottery of the second main game side is about 1/30, and that “2A: 7A = 300: 724” and “2B: 7B = 300: 724 "and" 2BK: 7BK = 300: 724 ".

  Next, FIG. 136 is a flowchart of the other main game variation control process according to the subroutine of Step 3350 (eighth variation 3) in FIG. 134 of the third modification from the eighth embodiment. This processing is executed when the stopped main game symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. First, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether the stopped main game symbol is the first main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3354, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the second main game symbol is changing. Is determined. In the case of Yes at Step 3354, at Step 3356, the game content determination means MN forcibly stops the changing second main game symbol due to loss, and shifts to the next process (the process of Step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 3352, at Step 3358, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the first main game symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes at Step 3358, at Step 3360, the game content determining means MN temporarily stops the changing first main game symbol, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1500). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3354 or step 3358, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1500). In addition, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol that has been temporarily stopped is configured to resume the fluctuation after the end of the big hit or the small hit related to the stopped second main game symbol, and the first main game symbol in which the fluctuation is restarted is set. May be configured to stop based on the result of the lottery determination and the result of the symbol lottery selected before the start of the change, or may be configured to stop due to a loss. With this configuration, when the first main game big hit symbol is stopped in the non-time shortened game state and the second limited frequency state, the second main game symbol is changed, The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is long, and the jackpot related to the second main game symbol should not be executed. Therefore, the changing second main game symbol is forcibly stopped by losing, and the non-time When the second main game big hit symbol or the second main game small hit symbol is stopped in the shortened game state and the first limited frequency state, the first main game symbol is changed when the first main game symbol is changed. Even if a big hit occurs, the game performance is not impaired, so the first main game symbol during the change is temporarily stopped. Note that the configuration is not limited to only the third modification example from the eighth embodiment, and may be applied to another embodiment of the present example such as the fifth embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 137 is a flowchart of the limited frequency end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 134 of the third modification example from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the eighth embodiment are Step 1570 (Eighth Modification 3), Step 1572 (Eighth Modification 3), Step 1574 (Eighth Modification 3) to Step 1578 (Eighth Modification 3). If the count value of the limited frequency counter MP53c is greater than 0 in step 1552, in step 1570 (eighth modification 3), the limited frequency control unit MP53 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage unit MB30b and sets the currently set value. It is determined whether the current limited frequency type is in the second limited frequency state. If Yes in step 1570 (eighth modification 3), the flow shifts to step 1554 to execute a subtraction process of the limited frequency counter MP53c. On the other hand, if No in Step 1570 (Eighth Modification 3), in Step 1572 (Eighth Modification 3), the limited frequency control means MP53 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. It is determined whether the executed change in the main game symbol is a change in the first main game symbol. If Yes in Step 1572 (Eighth Modification 3), the process proceeds to Step 1574 (Eighth Modification 3). If No, the subtraction process of the limited frequency counter MP53c is executed in Step 1554.

  Next, in step 1574 (eighth modification 3), the limited frequency control unit MP53 refers to the limited frequency counter P53c and determines whether the counter value is within a specific range (see an example of a specific range in the figure). Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 1574 (Eighth Modification 3) In Step 1576 (Eighth Modification 3), the limited frequency control unit MP53 sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type, and proceeds to Step 1556. On the other hand, if No in Step 1574 (Eighth Modification 3), in Step 1578 (Eighth Modification 3), the limited frequency control means MP53 sets the second limited frequency as the limited frequency type, and proceeds to Step 1556.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of the specific range. As shown in the drawing, the specific range of the third modification example from the eighth embodiment is that the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c is “499 to 490”, “399 to 390”, “299 to 290”, “199”. ~ 190 "," 99-90 ", and the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c is in a specific range, that is, the main gaming symbol is changed to the first limited frequency state by 10 changes every 100 changes. (If the state is not the first limited frequency state, the state is the second limited frequency state). With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game while expecting the 10 profitable fluctuations that are visited every 100 fluctuations. In addition, in the case of shifting to the first limited frequency state, if a big hit (a big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol or a big hit triggered by the small hit) triggers the change before the change of the main game symbol changes by 10, the second hit The one limited frequency state ends before the 10 fluctuations have been exhausted, but if there is no big hit (a big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol or a big hit triggered by the small hit) (during loss or small hit game) In the first winning frequency state (without maintaining the first limiting frequency state), 10 fluctuations can be consumed in the V winning opening C26 (there was no ball entering the winning port C26). Thus, in the third modification example from the eighth embodiment, the number of times the main game symbol has changed since the end of the big hit (or after the end of the small hit) (the number of times the first main game symbol fluctuates may not be counted). , A plurality of transitions of the limited frequency state (the first limited frequency state → the second limited frequency state → the first limited frequency state → the second limited frequency state...) Can be executed based on. It should be noted that the process of subtracting the limited frequency counter value in the first limited frequency state is executed only when the second main game symbol fluctuates, and the limited frequency counter value is not subtracted when the first main game symbol fluctuates. With this configuration, in the chance zone (first limited frequency state) where a small hit is made by the player, a change in the first main game symbol having a low profit does not reduce the number of times of change that becomes a chance. , And can be a user-friendly gaming machine.

  Next, FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (Eighth Modification 3) of Modification 3 from the eighth embodiment. First, in step 1787-1, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and selects a special game (a big hit or a small hit triggered by the stoppage of the big hit symbol) which has been won in the current time reduction game state. It is determined whether it is after the end of the big hit (triggered by the hit). In the case of Yes at step 1787-1, at step 1787-2, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1787-3, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (in this example, 100 times) to a time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1787-4, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). I do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1787-1, at step 1787-5, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and selects the special game (big hit) currently won in the first limited frequency state. It is determined whether it is after the end of the big hit or the big hit triggered by the stop of the symbol). If Yes in step 1787-5, in step 1787-6, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1787-7, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined value (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1787-8, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1800). I do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1787-5, at Step 1787-9, the specific game control means MP50 sets the first limited frequency as the limited frequency type. Next, in step 1787-10, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number (500 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MP53c as a limited frequency counter value, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). Transition. As described above, in the third modified example from the eighth embodiment, in the case where the special game is won in the time-reduced game state or the non-time-reduced game state and the first limited frequency state, that is, in a state advantageous to the player. After the end of the special game, the game shifts to the time reduction game state, and if the special game is won in the non-time reduction game state and the second limited frequency state, that is, in a state disadvantageous to the player, the special game ends. After that, the state shifts to the non-time-saving game state and the first limited frequency state, and thereafter, the “first limited frequency state → the second limited frequency state → the first limited frequency state → the second limited frequency state ...” until a jackpot is won. ”, The limited frequency state changes.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification example from the eighth embodiment, the game ball enters the V winning opening in the large winning opening as a configuration in which a payout is obtained using a small hit. In a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by playing a ball, a parallel lottery is configured to be executable, and a limited frequency state advantageous to the player and a limited frequency state disadvantageous to the player are provided. In the case of a big hit, the change of the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped by a loss, while when the big hit is made on the second main game side, the change of the first main game symbol is temporarily stopped. This can prevent a situation in which the limited frequency state advantageous to the player ends. In addition, the limited frequency state advantageous to the player and the limited frequency state disadvantageous to each other are alternately changed according to the elapse of the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol after the end of the big hit, so that the player is always in the advantageous limited frequency state. The game can proceed with expectation, and the interest of the game will be enhanced.

(Modification Example 4 from Eighth Embodiment)
In the configuration as described in the third modification example of the eighth embodiment, a big hit is executed by a game ball entering a V winning opening in a big winning opening as a configuration for acquiring a payout using a small hit. In such a gaming machine, a parallel lottery was configured to be executable, and the limited frequency state advantageous to the player and the limited frequency state disadvantageous were configured to alternately transition, but using such an idea, A novel game characteristic different from the above-mentioned game characteristics can be further created. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a fourth modification from the eighth embodiment, and only the points different from the third modification from the eighth embodiment will be described in detail below. Furthermore, since Modification Example 4 from the eighth embodiment is a modification example based on Modification Example 3 from the eighth embodiment, any of Modification Example 3 from this embodiment to Eighth Embodiment is shown. It is also supplemented that the configuration is applicable in the fourth modification example from the eighth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 139 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 5 of the fourth modification example from the eighth embodiment. The changes from the third modification from the eighth embodiment are steps 1840 (eighth modification 4) to step 1846 (eighth modification 4), that is, after turning off the small hit execution flag in step 1826, In step 1840 (eighth variation 4), the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the gaming state temporary storage means MB, and determines whether the finished small hitting game is a small hitting game won in the first limited frequency state. Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 1840 (Eighth Modification 4), in Step 1842 (Eighth Modification 4), the small hitting game control means MP40 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, The current stop symbol is a low profit small hit symbol (a small hit symbol in which the set limited frequency state can be changed from the first limited frequency state to the second limited frequency state, in this example, 2BK). judge. If Yes in Step 1842 (Eighth Modification 4), in Step 1844 (Eighth Modification 4), the small hitting game control means MP40 sets the second limited frequency state as the limited frequency type. Next, at step 1846 (eighth variation 4), the small hitting game control means MP40 sets a predetermined value (500 times in this example) to the counter value of the limited frequency counter MP53c, and executes the following processing {step 1950 ( The process proceeds to the eighth step (1). Note that also in the case of No in step 1840 (eighth modification 4), the processing shifts to the next processing {the processing of step 1950 (eighth)}. As described above, in the fourth modification example from the eighth embodiment, when the small hit is won in the first limited frequency state, the stop symbol of the small hit is changed to the high profit small hit symbol (the set limited frequency state is This is a small hit symbol that cannot be changed from the first limited frequency state to the second limited frequency state. In this example, when the pattern is 7BK), the first limited frequency state is maintained, and the stop symbol for the small hit is low. In the case of the small profit winning symbol, the set limited frequency state is changed from the first limited frequency state to the second limited frequency state.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification example from the eighth embodiment, as a configuration in which a payout is obtained using a small hit, a game ball enters a V winning opening in a large winning opening. In a gaming machine in which a big hit is executed by playing a ball, a parallel lottery can be executed, and a limited frequency state advantageous to the player and a limited frequency state unfavorable for the player are provided. As the number of times the game symbol fluctuates, the limited frequency state that is advantageous to the player and the limited frequency state that is disadvantageous are alternately changed,

  Note that the gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the eighth embodiment can maintain the first limited frequency state (high profit limited frequency state) when the small hit is won in the first limited frequency state. The game may be specialized in whether it shifts to the 2 limited frequency state (low profit limited frequency state). For example, the second main game small hit winning probability is increased, and the first first limited frequency is set. In the period in which the state is set (in this example, 10 fluctuations), it may be configured to win the small hit with a probability of 1/2 or more, or the number of long-term fluctuations (almost certainly after the end of the big hit) The first limited frequency state (high profit limited frequency state) is maintained by winning the small hits during the first limited frequency state during which the small hits are the number of fluctuations of the degree of winning (for example, 500 times). Can you move to the second limited frequency state (low profit limited frequency state) It may be adjusted selectivity of Koatari symbols as if Mau is a game of such determined.

  In the fourth modification from the eighth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, in the low profit state (the non-time shortened game state, the non-limited frequency state, the second limited frequency state), the small size of the first main game side is reduced. When the hit is executed, the second limited frequency state stay period is set to a relatively short time as the limited frequency state transition after the end of the small hit, while the small hit on the second main game side is executed. Alternatively, the second limited frequency state stay period may be configured to be relatively long as the limited frequency state transition after the end of the small hit. In addition, in the first limited frequency state and the second limited frequency state, when the game ball is continuously fired at a pace of 100 balls in 60 seconds, if the jackpot is not won, how to fire However, the number of game balls may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls per small hit is three). Further, in a situation where the second main gaming side is in the first limited frequency state, a plurality of limited frequency states are transited as the limited frequency state of the first main gaming side (for example, the first limited frequency state A → the first limited frequency state). B, etc., and thus, the variation pattern table can be changed for performing the effect). Also, the game may be configured to proceed with right-handing even in the first limited frequency state, and a right-handed instruction display may be displayed in the first limited frequency state. In addition, when the game progresses by right-handing in the first limited frequency state (when the game progresses by the firing method to be executed according to the situation), the second main game-side symbol fluctuation is more than the symbol fluctuation. It is desirable that the symbol change on the game side is configured to be relatively easy to be executed (the number of changes is large). Further, in the second limited frequency state, when the game is advanced by left-handing (when the game is advanced by the firing method to be executed according to the situation), the symbol is more limited than the symbol variation on the second main game side. In the case where the game progresses by right-handing in the frequency state (when the game progresses by the firing method to be executed according to the situation), the symbol fluctuation on the second main game side is relatively easier to be executed (fluctuation) It is preferable that the number of times is large.

(Ninth embodiment)
A gaming machine having a new configuration can be created as a configuration applicable to the various gaming pachinko gaming machines described in the above embodiment. Thus, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a ninth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail. Further, since the ninth embodiment is a modification based on the present embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the fourth modification of the present embodiment to the eighth embodiment can be applied in the ninth embodiment. It should be added that

  First, FIG. 140 is a flowchart of the fixed variable time determination process according to the subroutine of step 3400 (ninth) of the ninth embodiment. In the ninth embodiment, a variable fixed time determination process is provided as in the sixth embodiment, and the execution timing of this process is the same as that in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the fluctuation fixing control means MN30 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game time reduction flag is on (in other words, in the time reduction game state). Then, it is determined whether or not the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in a state where it is easy to open and the second main game starting port B10 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the change fixing control means MN30 refers to the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, and determines whether the change is a change related to the small hit symbol. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be short (0.2 seconds in this example), and performs the next processing (processing in step 1418). Move to

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3402 or 3404, in step 3408, the fluctuation fixing control unit MN30 determines the fluctuation fixing time of the fluctuation to be long (0.8 seconds in this example), and performs the next processing ( The processing shifts to step 1418). As described above, in the ninth embodiment, at the end of the fluctuation relating to the time reduction game state and the small hit, the fluctuation fixed time is configured to be shorter than in other situations. The configuration of the time value of the variable fixed time is not limited to this, and the variable fixed time may be different in all the symbols between the time shortened game state and the non-time reduced game state. Although not shown, the output time of the external terminal signal is also different if the fixed time is different (the output time of the external terminal signal is longer if the fixed time is longer). Time).

  Next, FIG. 141 is a flowchart of a special game control process according to a subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 5 of the ninth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are steps 1745-1 (ninth) to step 1747-1 (ninth), that is, after turning on the special game transfer permission flag in step 1702, In ninth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the inside of the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the special game start demonstration flag (the flag which is turned on during the special game start demonstration time) is off. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1745-1 (ninth), in step 1745-2 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game start demonstration flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. To Next, in step 1745-3 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game being executed is the special game which has been won in the non-time shortening game state. Is determined. In the case of Yes at step 1745-3 (ninth), at step 1745-4 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 measures the special game start demonstration time, which is a special game start demonstration timer MP34t-3 (decrement timer). To a long time (in this example, 5 seconds, which is longer than the short time set in step 1745-5 (ninth)) and start. The flow shifts to 1745-6 (ninth). On the other hand, if No in step 1745-3 (ninth), in step 1745-5 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 sets the special game start demonstration timer MP34t-3 (decrement timer, special game start demonstration time). Is set to a short time (a timer for measuring the time) {in this example, it is 3 seconds, which should be shorter than the long time set in step 1745-4 (ninth)}, and the processing is started. Then, the flow shifts to step 1745-6 (ninth). Note that, also in the case of No in step 1745-1 (ninth), the processing shifts to step 174-6 (ninth).

  Next, in step 1745-6 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game start demonstration timer MP34t-3 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. If Yes in step 1745-6 (ninth), in step 1745-7 (ninth), the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game start demonstration flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Then, the process proceeds to step 1704. If the answer is No in Step 1745-6 (ninth), the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 1800). Thus, in the ninth embodiment, the special game start demonstration time is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the special game winning, and the special game start demo time is different when the special game start demonstration time is different. The output time of the external terminal signal related to the demonstration time is also configured to be different (when the special game start demonstration time is long, the output time of the external terminal signal is also long).

  With the configuration described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment, the variable fixed time is configured to be different depending on the game state and the stop symbol, and the external terminal signal output period is also based on the variable fixed time. In addition to the special game start demonstration time, the time value of the special game start demonstration time can be made different depending on the game state at the time of the special game winning, and the external terminal signal output period is also made different based on the special game start demonstration time. Therefore, even if a hold cannot be caused in the non-time shortened game state, by increasing the interval of each fluctuation, the player may feel tired because the game is not progressing. It is possible to reduce the fear of playing, and to appropriately execute a special game start demonstration effect according to a situation such as a game state.

(Modification Example 1 from Ninth Embodiment)
In the configuration as described in the above embodiment, the time values of the variable fixed time and the special game start demonstration time are configured to be different depending on the game state and / or the stop symbol, but other elements are changed to the game state and / or Or you may comprise so that it may differ with a stop symbol. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as a first modification example from the ninth embodiment, and only the points different from the ninth embodiment will be described below in detail. Furthermore, since the first modification example from the ninth embodiment is also a modification example based on the ninth embodiment, any of the configurations shown in the present embodiment to the ninth embodiment is also different from the ninth embodiment. It is also supplemented that the present invention can be applied in the first modification.

  First, FIG. 142 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 5 of the first modification example from the ninth embodiment. Differences from this embodiment are steps 1746-1 (ninth variation 1) to step 1746-7 (ninth variation 1), that is, after turning on the special game transition permission flag in step 1702, In 1746-1 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the inside of the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game end demonstration flag (the flag which is turned on during the special game end demonstration time) ) Is turned off. If Yes in step 1746-1 (ninth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1704, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1).

  After setting the special game end instruction command in step 1738, in step 1746-2 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 sets the special game in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on the end demo flag. Next, in step 1746-3 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the special game is a special game which has been won in the non-time shortening game state. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1746-3 (ninth variation 1), in step 1746-4 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 sets the special game end demo timer MP34t-2 (decrement timer and ends the special game end). Set a long time (a timer for measuring the demonstration time) {5 seconds in this example, which should be longer than the short time set in step 1746-5 (ninth variation 1)}. Then, the process proceeds to step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1). On the other hand, if No in step 1746-3 (ninth variation 1), in step 1746-5 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 sets the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 (decrement timer, special The timer for measuring the game end demonstration time) is short (in this example, it is 3 seconds, which is shorter than the long time set in step 1746-4 (ninth variation 1)). Is set, and the process proceeds to step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1).

  Next, in step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game end demonstration timer MP34t-2 and determines whether or not the timer value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1), in step 1746-7 (ninth variation 1), the special game control means MP30 sets the special game in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. The end demo flag is turned off, and the routine goes to step 1750. If the answer is No in Step 1746-6 (ninth variation 1), the process moves to the next process (the process in Step 1800). As described above, in the first modification example from the ninth embodiment, the special game end demo time is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the special game win, and the special game end demo time is different. Is configured so that the output time of the external terminal signal related to the special game end demonstration time is also different (if the special game end demonstration time is long, the output time of the external terminal signal is also long). In addition, as a configuration applicable to this example, when a small hit is won and no game ball enters the V winning opening C26 during the small hit, the game is not performed in the non-time shortening game state. The special game start demonstration time (or special game end demonstration time) related to the small hit when the small hit is won is the special game start related to the small hit when the small hit is won in the time shortened game state. It may be configured to be longer than the demonstration time (or the special game end demonstration time). Even in such a case, if the special game end demonstration time is different, the output time of the external terminal signal related to the special game end demonstration time is also different (if the special game end demonstration time is long, the external terminal If the special game start demonstration time is different, the output time of the external terminal signal related to the special game start demonstration time is also different (if the special game start demonstration time is long, the external time is longer). The output time of the terminal signal is also long). The special game start demonstration time is a time provided before the first R in the special game is started when the big hit symbol is stopped, and in the special game start demonstration time, the special game is won. An effect that congratulates the player, an effect related to the game explanation, and the like are executed. The special game end demonstration time is a time provided after the execution of the last round in the special game is completed. In the special game end demonstration time, effects related to the explanation of the game state after the end of the special game, In addition, an effect for displaying the payout acquired in the special game, an effect for alerting the user to forget to take out the IC card, and the like are executed.

  With the configuration as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 1 from the ninth embodiment, the time value of the special game end demonstration time can be made different depending on the gaming state at the time of the special game winning, By configuring the external terminal signal output period to be different based on the special game end demonstration time, it is possible to appropriately execute a special game end demonstration effect according to a situation such as a game state.

  In each of the embodiments described above in this example, the game state at the start of the small hit and at the end of the small hit are the same (the game state does not change by the small hit), and at the start of the big hit (immediately before the start). The game state at the end of the big hit (immediately after the end) can be changed. In addition, during the execution of the small hit, the gaming state immediately before the start of the small hit is maintained, while during the execution of the big hit, the gaming state is a non-probability varying gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state (when the time reducing gaming state is not provided, In the case where the non-probability changing game state and the probability changing game state are not provided, the game state is the non-time shortening game state.

<Summary>
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiment. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments may be added to these concepts as well as combining and separating the listed concepts.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (1)
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) into which game balls can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter, and
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which game balls can enter;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, starts the second main game start. A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (e.g., a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) having a configuration in which game balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter the main game start port B10) as compared to an open state;
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
Based on a ball entering the first main game start port (for example, the first main game start port A10), the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) displays the first main game identification information. First main game identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-) for controlling the first main game identification information to stop and display after the main game identification information is variably displayed. C),
Based on the ball entering the second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10), the second main game identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) is used. Second main game identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-) for controlling the second main game identification information to stop display after the main game identification information is variably displayed. C),
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening) until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses. While performing the first special game in which the player makes C10) an advantageous state once, the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode. After that, a second special game in which a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) is placed in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a predetermined number of entering balls or a specific time longer than the predetermined time elapses. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for controlling to execute a game,
The first variable period state in which the average value related to the variable display period of the second main game identification information is the first period, and the average value related to the variable display period of the second main game identification information is the first period. At least a second variable period state that is a shorter second period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a variable period state control unit (for example, one of the first variable period state and the second variable period state) , Limited frequency control means MP53),
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the easy entry ball game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be changed from the closed state to the open state to execute the easy entering game. Game determination executing means (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B);
An easy-entering ball game state control that has a normal game state and a specific game state in which the easy-entering ball game is easier to execute than the normal game state, and that, when the specific conditions are satisfied, the normal game state or the specific game state. Means (for example, specific game control means MP50),
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode. ,
The probability that the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or The main game identification information cannot be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, while the second main game identification information can be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode.
When the second special game is executed during the normal game state, the second special game is configured to be in the specific game state after the execution of the second special game is completed, and when the second special game is in the specific game state, the first special game is performed. When the special game is executed, it is configured to maintain the specific game state even after the execution of the first special game,
In the case of the specific gaming state, it is configured to be any of the first variable period state and the second variable period state. In the second variable period state, the expected value relating to the number of prize balls awarded to the player per unit time during the period in which the second special game is not executed is configured to be larger. It is a pachinko gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (2)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying second identification information, and is fired toward a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). The game ball is also guided to a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20),
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information later;
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information later;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second winning opening C10, or the like) until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses. While performing the first special game in which the player places the special winning opening C20) in an advantageous state for the player once, the first special information or the second specific information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode. Is a game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10 and the second winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls or a specific time longer than the predetermined time elapses. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for controlling to execute a second special game to be performed a plurality of times;
The first variable period state in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is the first period, and the second value in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is shorter than the first period. A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency control unit MP53) that has at least a second variable period state that is a period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, sets either the first variable period state or the second variable period state. ) And
The second identification information is configured such that the probability of the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or the first identification information is the first predetermined mode. The second identification information is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode while being unable to be stopped and displayed in the mode,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode when in the first variable period state, the second variable period state is configured when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the stop display. And, when the first special game is executed while in the second fluctuation period state, the second fluctuation period state is maintained even after the end of the execution of the first special game,
In a case where game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and in the first variable period state, a period in which the second special game is not executed While the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the first special game per unit time becomes smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time in the second starting port ( For example, when the game balls are fired at the predetermined interval toward the second main game start port B10) and in the second fluctuation period state, the number of game balls fired per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to a player by executing the first special game per unit time is larger.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (3) is:
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information, and is fired toward a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10). The game ball is also guided to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and a variable winning port (for example, a large winning port C10),
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) based on a ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information later;
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information later;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is provided to the player by a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time. While executing the first special game in which the game in the advantageous state is performed once, after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode, a predetermined number of entering balls or A special game control means for controlling the execution of a second special game in which a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) is placed in an advantageous state for a player a plurality of times until a specific time longer than a predetermined time elapses. For example, special game control means MP30),
The first variable period state in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is the first period, and the second value in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is shorter than the first period. A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency control unit MP53) that has at least a second variable period state that is a period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, sets either the first variable period state or the second variable period state. ), The variable display of the second identification information can be started even when the first identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the first identification information can be started even when the second identification information is being displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be able to start,
The second identification information is configured such that the probability of the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or the first identification information is the first predetermined mode. The second identification information is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode while being unable to be stopped and displayed in the mode,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode when in the first variable period state, it is configured to be able to enter the second variable period state after completion of execution of the second special game based on the stop display. And, when the first special game is executed while in the second fluctuation period state, it is configured to maintain the second fluctuation period state even after the execution of the first special game,
This is the case where the game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) and the first starting port (for example, In the case where the game ball is fired at the predetermined interval toward the first main game start port A10) and the state is in the second fluctuation period state, the unit time per unit time during the period when the second special game is not executed is A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that an expected value relating to the number of prize balls given to a player by executing a first special game is increased.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (4)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying second identification information, and is fired toward a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). The game ball is also configured to be guided to a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10),
Based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2), a first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10-2). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the game symbol display section A21g). -C) and
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information later;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is provided to the player by a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time. While executing the first special game in which the game in the advantageous state is performed once, after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode, a predetermined number of entering balls or A special game control means for controlling the execution of a second special game in which a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) is placed in an advantageous state for a player a plurality of times until a specific time longer than a predetermined time elapses. For example, special game control means MP30),
The first variable period state in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is the first period, and the second value in which the average value of the second identification information related to the variable display period is shorter than the first period. A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency control unit MP53) that has at least a second variable period state that is a period, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, sets either the first variable period state or the second variable period state. ) And
The second identification information is configured such that the probability of the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or the first identification information is the first predetermined mode. The second identification information is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode while being unable to be stopped and displayed in the mode,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode when in the first variable period state, it is configured to be able to enter the second variable period state after completion of execution of the second special game based on the stop display. And, when the first special game is executed while in the second fluctuation period state, it is configured to maintain the second fluctuation period state even after the execution of the first special game,
In a case where game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and in the first variable period state, a period in which the second special game is not executed While the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the first special game per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time during the second start port ( For example, when the game balls are fired at the predetermined interval toward the second main game start port B10) and the state is the second fluctuation period state, the number of game balls fired per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time. The expected value pertaining to the number of prize balls given to the player by executing the first special game per unit time is configured to be larger,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode is a predetermined probability; A high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability of the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode are higher than the predetermined probability; When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode at the time of, it is configured to be in a high probability lottery state after the execution of the second special game based on the stop display is completed, and When the first special game is executed in the probability lottery state, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to maintain the high probability lottery state even after the execution of the first special game ends. .

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5)
A first starting port (for example, a left first main game starting port A10-1 and a right first main game starting port A10-2), which are entrances into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10), which is an entrance for game balls to enter;
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, right first main game start port A10-2) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the predetermined entrance A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the right first main game start port A10-2) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the predetermined entrance (for example, A variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d) in which the game ball cannot enter the right first main game start port A10-2 or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state. )When,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying second identification information, and is fired toward a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). The game ball is also guided to a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20),
Based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a left first main game starting port A10-1, a right first main game starting port A10-2), a first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information later;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) is played until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time has elapsed. While the first special game in which the player makes a game that is in an advantageous state once is executed, after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode, a predetermined number of entering balls Alternatively, a special control that controls to execute a second special game in which a game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a specific time longer than the predetermined time elapses is performed. Game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode is a predetermined probability. The high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode has a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a low probability lottery state And a lottery state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling so as to take any one of a high probability lottery state;
A first change state in which the selection tendency related to the variable display time of the second identification information is the first selection tendency, and a second change state in which the selection tendency related to the variable display time of the second identification information is different from the first selection tendency. A change state control means (for example, a limited frequency control means MP53) having a second change state having a selection tendency of, and controlling to take any one of the first change state and the second change state;
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d), the variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric power-operated accessory A11-2d) is more variable than the non-open easy state and the non-open easy state. The easy-to-open state control means (for example, the specific game control means) that controls the accessory A11-2d) to have an easy-to-open state in which the easy-to-open state is likely to be in the open state, and to take either the easy-to-open state or the easy-to-open state. MP50), a first gaming state in which a low-probability lottery state is set and a first change state and a non-open easy state, and a second game state in which a high-probability lottery state is set and a second change state and a non-open easy state are provided. It is configured to be able to take any of the gaming state,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or the first identification information is the first predetermined mode. The second identification information is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode while being unable to be stopped and displayed in the mode,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode when in the first game state, it is configured to be able to enter the second game state after completion of execution of the second special game based on the stop display. And, when the first special game is executed during the second game state, the second game state is maintained even after the execution of the first special game,
When the game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and in the first game state, during the period when the second special game is not executed While the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the first special game per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time of the second starting port (for example, In the case where the game balls are fired at the predetermined interval toward the second main game start port B10) and in the second game state, the number of the game balls per unit time is smaller than the number of the game balls fired per unit time. It is configured such that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by performing the first special game per time is larger,
It is related to the number of prize balls awarded to the player by executing the first special game until the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined state in the second game state after the second game state. The expected value is the number of prize balls given to the player by the second special game executed based on the first identification information or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode in the second game state. The pachinko gaming machine is configured not to exceed the maximum value according to (1).

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6)
A first starting port (for example, a left first main game starting port A10-1 and a right first main game starting port A10-2), which are entrances into which game balls can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10), which is an entrance for game balls to enter;
A variable member attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, right first main game start port A10-2) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the predetermined entrance A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the right first main game start port A10-2) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the predetermined entrance (for example, A variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d) in which the game ball cannot enter the right first main game start port A10-2 or is difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state. )When,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display portion (for example, a second main game symbol display portion B21g) capable of displaying second identification information, and is fired toward a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10). The game ball is also guided to a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20),
Based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a left first main game starting port A10-1, a right first main game starting port A10-2), a first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information later;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) is played until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time has elapsed. While the first special game in which the player makes a game that is in an advantageous state once is executed, after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode, a predetermined number of entering balls Alternatively, a special control that controls to execute a second special game in which a game in which a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) is in an advantageous state for the player a plurality of times until a specific time longer than the predetermined time elapses is performed. Game control means (for example, special game control means MP30),
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode is a predetermined probability. The high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode and the probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode has a higher probability than the predetermined probability, and a low probability lottery state And a lottery state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling so as to take any one of a high probability lottery state;
A first change state in which the selection tendency related to the variable display time of the second identification information is the first selection tendency, and a second change state in which the selection tendency related to the variable display time of the second identification information is different from the first selection tendency. A change state control means (for example, a limited frequency control means MP53) having a second change state having a selection tendency of, and controlling to take any one of the first change state and the second change state;
As the game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric accessory A11-2d), the variable member (for example, the first main game start port electric power-operated accessory A11-2d) is more variable than the non-open easy state and the non-open easy state. The easy-to-open state control means (for example, the specific game control means) that controls the accessory A11-2d) to have an easy-to-open state in which the easy-to-open state is likely to be in the open state, and to take either the easy-to-open state or the easy-to-open state. MP50), a first gaming state in which a low-probability lottery state is set and a first change state and a non-open easy state, and a second game state in which a high-probability lottery state is set and a second change state and a non-open easy state are provided. It is configured to be able to take any of the gaming state,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode, or the first identification information is the first predetermined mode. The second identification information is configured to be able to be stopped and displayed in the first predetermined mode while being unable to be stopped and displayed in the mode,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the second predetermined mode when in the first game state, it is configured to be able to enter the second game state after completion of execution of the second special game based on the stop display. And, when the first special game is executed during the second game state, the second game state is maintained even after the execution of the first special game,
When the game balls are fired at a predetermined interval toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and in the first game state, during the period when the second special game is not executed While the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the first special game per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls fired per unit time of the second starting port (for example, In the case where the game balls are fired at the predetermined interval toward the second main game start port B10) and in the second game state, the number of the game balls per unit time is smaller than the number of the game balls fired per unit time. It is configured such that the expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by performing the first special game per time is larger,
The selection tendency relating to the variable display time of the first identification information in the case of the first game state is the selection tendency relating to the variable display time of the first identification information before the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the selection tendency relating to the variable display time before satisfying the predetermined condition. It is configured so that the selection tendency relating to the variable display time of the first identification information after the end may be different,
The selection tendency related to the variable display time of the second identification information in the second gaming state is uniform during the period of the second gaming state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7)
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) into which game balls can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter, and
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which game balls can enter;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, starts the second main game start. A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (e.g., a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) having a configuration in which game balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter the main game start port B10) as compared to an open state;
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning port C20) can enter;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First main game random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition means) for acquiring a first main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a first main game start port (for example, first main game start port A10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A);
When the first main game random number is acquired by the first main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the change display start condition of the first main game identification information is set. The obtained first main game random number is temporarily stored until the first main game random number is satisfied, and the first main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A first main game random number pass / fail judgment is performed based on a first main game random number pertaining to a certain first hold when a variable display start condition of the first main game identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A);
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the result of the judgment of the first main game random number judgment unit (for example, the first main game judgment unit MN11-A). ), The first main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
A second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition unit) that acquires a second main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the second main game random number is acquired by the second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is set. The obtained second main game random number is temporarily stored until the second main game random number is satisfied, and second main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A second main game random number pass / fail judgment that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the second main game random number pertaining to the certain second hold when the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the result of the judgment of the second main game random number judgment unit (for example, the second main game judgment unit MN11-B). ), The second main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the variable winning openings (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) are given to the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for controlling to execute a special game which can be in an advantageous state;
The low probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and the high probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, during execution of a special game When there is a ball in a specific area (for example, specific area C22), a lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling after the execution of the special game to be in a high probability lottery state. ), The variable display start condition of the second main game identification information can be satisfied even when the first main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second main game identification information is in a variable display. The first main game identification information is configured to be able to satisfy the variable display start condition, and the second main game identification information is displayed in the second main mode more stopped than in the predetermined mode. The game identification information is stopped in the predetermined mode. Better when it is displayed, a specific area during execution of the special game (e.g., a particular region C22) are configured such that the inlet ball to the relatively easy,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the easy entry ball game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be changed from the closed state to the open state to execute the easy entering game. Game execution means (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B);
An easy-entering ball game state control means (including a normal game state and a specific game state in which the easy-entering ball game is more easily executed than the normal game state, and controlling to be in the specific game state in the high-probability lottery state) For example, a specific game control means MP50)
In the case of the specific gaming state, the average value of the variable display time of the second main game identification information is relatively shorter than the average value of the variable display time of the first main game identification information, And, the number of patterns related to the variable display time of the second main game identification information is configured to be relatively smaller than the number of patterns related to the variable display time of the first main game identification information,
In the case of the normal gaming state, the average value of the variable display time of the second main game identification information is relatively shorter than the average value of the variable display time of the first main game identification information, And, the number of patterns related to the variable display time of the second main game identification information is configured to be relatively smaller than the number of patterns related to the variable display time of the first main game identification information,
The number of patterns related to the variable display time of the first main game identification information in the specific game state is greater than the number of patterns related to the variable display time of the first main game identification information in the case of the normal game state. It is configured to be relatively small,
In both the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, the first pending look-ahead effect indicating or notifying the content of the game scheduled for the first hold in the future is displayed on the predetermined effect display unit. In the normal game state and the specific game state, the second hold look-ahead effect for indicating or notifying the contents of the game scheduled for the second hold in the future in both the normal game state and the specific game state Is configured not to be executed in the predetermined effect display unit,
In the case of the normal game state, the information on the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first hold is the first hold look-ahead effect, while in the specific game state, the information of the hit / fail determination of the first hold A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the information relating to the variable display time of the first main game identification information to be executed based on the result is a first pending prefetch effect.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8)
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) into which game balls can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter, and
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which game balls can enter;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, starts the second main game start. A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (e.g., a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) having a configuration in which game balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter the main game start port B10) as compared to an open state;
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning port C20) can enter;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First main game random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition means) for acquiring a first main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a first main game start port (for example, first main game start port A10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A);
When the first main game random number is acquired by the first main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the change display start condition of the first main game identification information is set. The obtained first main game random number is temporarily stored until the first main game random number is satisfied, and the first main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A first main game random number pass / fail judgment is performed based on a first main game random number pertaining to a certain first hold when a variable display start condition of the first main game identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A);
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the result of the judgment of the first main game random number judgment unit (for example, the first main game judgment unit MN11-A). ), The first main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
A second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition unit) that acquires a second main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the second main game random number is acquired by the second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is set. The obtained second main game random number is temporarily stored until the second main game random number is satisfied, and second main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A second main game random number pass / fail judgment that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the second main game random number pertaining to the certain second hold when the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the result of the judgment of the second main game random number judgment unit (for example, the second main game judgment unit MN11-B). ), The second main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the variable winning openings (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) are given to the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for controlling to execute a special game which can be in an advantageous state;
The low probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and the high probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, during execution of a special game When there is a ball in a specific area (for example, specific area C22), a lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling after the execution of the special game to be in a high probability lottery state. ), The variable display start condition of the second main game identification information can be satisfied even when the first main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second main game identification information is in a variable display. The first main game identification information is configured to be able to satisfy the variable display start condition, and the second main game identification information is displayed in the second main mode more stopped than in the predetermined mode. The game identification information is stopped in the predetermined mode. Better when it is displayed, a specific area during execution of the special game (e.g., a particular region C22) are configured such that the inlet ball to the relatively easy,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the easy entry ball game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be changed from the closed state to the open state to execute the easy entering game. Game execution means (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B);
An easy-entering ball game state control means (including a normal game state and a specific game state in which the easy-entering ball game is more easily executed than the normal game state, and controlling to be in the specific game state in the high-probability lottery state) For example, a specific game control means MP50)
During the execution of the special game, a variable winning opening (for example, the first winning opening C10, the second winning winning opening C20) until a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time elapses. It is possible to execute a unit game in which the large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) are in an advantageous state for the player, and before the execution of the unit game or after the execution of the unit game, a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C20). A special game standby period is a period in which the winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) are maintained in the closed state, and the specific area is executed during the execution of the special game executed in the specific gaming state. (For example, to the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed in the normal gaming state, rather than to the special game standby period when there is a ball in the specific area C22. There was a ball If the special game during the waiting period in the case is configured so as to be a long period of time,
When executing a unit game during execution of a special game, a first unit game in which a ball can enter a specific area (for example, specific area C22) and a specific area (for example, specific area C22) It is possible to execute any of the second unit games in which ball entry is impossible or difficult compared to the first unit game,
In accordance with the variable display of the first main game identification information or the variable display of the second main game identification information, the effect display can be executed on a predetermined effect display unit (for example, the display area SG10), and the predetermined mode is provided. An effect corresponding to the variable display when the first unit game is scheduled to be displayed during the execution of the special game executed after the stop display and the special game executed after the stop is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect display that is a display,
According to the variation display of the second main game identification information in the normal game state, rather than the number of execution patterns related to the specific effect display according to the variation display of the first main game identification information in the normal game state. The number of execution patterns pertaining to the specific effect display is smaller in the specific game state than the number of execution patterns pertaining to the specific effect display corresponding to the variable display of the first main game identification information in the specific game state. In a certain case, the number of execution patterns related to the specific effect display according to the variable display of the second main game identification information is configured to be smaller,
When performing the production display in the specific game state, the display frequency of the first main game identification information is suggested or changed, rather than the execution frequency of the one indicating that the display is stopped in the predetermined mode. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the notification frequency is higher than the execution frequency.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9)
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
A first main game start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) into which game balls can enter;
A second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which game balls can enter, and
An auxiliary game start port (for example, an auxiliary game start port H10) into which game balls can enter;
A variable member attached to a second main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, starts the second main game start. A game ball can enter the mouth (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the second main game starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10). A variable member (e.g., a second main game start port electric accessory B11d) having a configuration in which game balls cannot enter or are difficult to enter the main game start port B10) as compared to an open state;
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning port C20) can enter;
A first main game identification information display unit capable of displaying the first main game identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
An auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information,
The main game section (for example, main control board M)
First main game random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition means) for acquiring a first main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a first main game start port (for example, first main game start port A10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A);
When the first main game random number is acquired by the first main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the change display start condition of the first main game identification information is set. The obtained first main game random number is temporarily stored until the first main game random number is satisfied, and the first main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A first main game random number pass / fail judgment is performed based on a first main game random number pertaining to a certain first hold when a variable display start condition of the first main game identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A);
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the result of the judgment of the first main game random number judgment unit (for example, the first main game judgment unit MN11-A). ), The first main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
A second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, a second main game random number acquisition unit) that acquires a second main game random number based on the entry of a game ball into a second main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). Main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B);
When the second main game random number is acquired by the second main game random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is set. The obtained second main game random number is temporarily stored until the second main game random number is satisfied, and second main game random number temporary storage means (for example, the first and second main game symbol information temporary Storage means MB11b-C);
A second main game random number pass / fail judgment that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the second main game random number pertaining to the certain second hold when the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied. Determination means (for example, second main game success / failure lottery means MN11-B);
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the result of the judgment of the second main game random number judgment unit (for example, the second main game judgment unit MN11-B). ), The second main game identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second main game identification information to be displayed after being changed and displayed. ,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, the variable winning openings (for example, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20) are given to the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for controlling to execute a special game which can be in an advantageous state;
The low probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and the high probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, during execution of a special game When there is a ball in a specific area (for example, specific area C22), a lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling after the execution of the special game to be in a high probability lottery state. ), The variable display start condition of the second main game identification information can be satisfied even when the first main game identification information is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second main game identification information is in a variable display. The first main game identification information is configured to be able to satisfy the variable display start condition, and the second main game identification information is displayed in the second main mode more stopped than in the predetermined mode. The game identification information is stopped in the predetermined mode. Better when it is displayed, a specific area during execution of the special game (e.g., a particular region C22) are configured such that the inlet ball to the relatively easy,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
After variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information on the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) based on the ball entering the auxiliary game start port (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) Auxiliary game identification information display control means (for example, auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H) for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the easy entry ball game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be changed from the closed state to the open state to execute the easy entering game. Game execution means (for example, a second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B);
An easy-entering ball game state control means (including a normal game state and a specific game state in which the easy-entering ball game is more easily executed than the normal game state, and controlling to be in the specific game state in the high-probability lottery state) For example, a specific game control means MP50)
In the specific game state, the average value related to the variable display time of the first main game identification information is the first average value, and the average value related to the variable display time of the second main game identification information is the second average value. In the first game state and the specific game state, the average value related to the change display time of the first main game identification information is different from the first average value and / or the change of the second main game identification information. A second game state in which the average value related to the display time is different from the second average value, and when a predetermined game state transition condition is satisfied, the second game state is changed from the first game state to the second game state. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to transition to a state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (10) is:
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first start port (for example, first main game start port A10);
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A), the obtained first random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is displayed in accordance with the determination based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10);
When the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means (for example, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the obtained second random number is obtained until the condition for starting the variable display of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage unit (e.g., a hold control unit MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is used in accordance with the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As the game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. The game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means) that controls to be in a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit) In the case where the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is configured that after the variability display, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in a substantially definite manner. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20), the executed variable winning opening opening game is executed. Is configured so that the entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26) is substantially determined based on
Under the situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20), the second special game is newly executed during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained. Until the predetermined number is reached, a new second hold can occur until the predetermined number is reached, while the continuous firing of gaming balls toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20) is continued. Even under the circumstances, during the period in which the normal gaming state is maintained, a new second hold is configured to be impossible or extremely difficult to occur,
When the second special game is executed, regardless of whether the game is in the normal game state or the specific game state before the execution of the second special game, the specific game state and the normal game after the execution of the second special game A pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to sort any of the states.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (11)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10);
According to the determined content based on the first random number, control is performed such that the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10);
According to the determined content based on the second random number, control is performed such that the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As the game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. The game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means) that controls to be in a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed. MP50) and
When the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode after the variability display. This is configured to be substantially definite, and the variable winning opening opening game is performed under the condition that the continuous launch of the game ball toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20) is continued. When executed, the ball entering the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26) based on the executed variable winning opening game is configured to be substantially definite.
In the case where the second identification information change unit is from the start to the stop display of the change of the second identification information to the second identification information change unit, in the case of the specific game state, the normal game state and the normal game state are triggered by the second identification information change unit being performed once. On the other hand, when the first identification information change unit is from the start to the stop display of the change of the first identification information, the first identification information change unit is performed once in the specific game state, and Is also configured to maintain a specific gaming state thereafter.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (12)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state. A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the game ball is set in the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison with the non-enterable or open state,
A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, a second winning opening C20);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) where a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first start port (for example, first main game start port A10);
When the first random number is obtained by the first random number obtaining means (for example, the first main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-A), the obtained first random number is obtained until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling the first hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) is displayed in accordance with the determination based on the first random number related to the certain first hold. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g). )When,
After the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, a first special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on a ball entering a second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10);
When the second random number is obtained by the second random number obtaining means (for example, the second main game random number obtaining determination executing means MJ21-B), the obtained second random number is obtained until the condition for starting the variable display of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage unit (e.g., a hold control unit MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) is used in accordance with the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold. Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g). )When,
After the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening opening game control for executing the variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state. Means (for example, small hit game control means MP40),
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
As the game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), the normal game state and the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) are more variable than the normal game state. The game state transition control means (for example, the specific game control means) that controls to be in a specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed. MP50) and
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached, and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit) In the case where the second identification information is variably displayed in B21g), it is configured that after the variability display, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in a substantially definite manner. When the variable winning opening opening game is executed in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward the winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20), the executed variable winning opening opening game is executed. Is configured so that the entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26) is substantially determined based on
Variation of the second identification information during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained The total display period regarding the display period is the first total period, and the variation of the second identification information during the period in which the specific gaming state is maintained A case where the total display period for the display period is a second total period longer than the first total period, and
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port) in the first total period under a situation where the game balls are continuously fired toward a variable winning port (for example, a second winning port C20). B10) in the second total period in the second total period under the situation where the continuous launch of the game ball toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second winning opening C20) is larger than the expected number of incoming balls to the second winning period. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the expected number of balls entering a starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is increased.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (13)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port (1) B10-1, a second main game starting port (2) B10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a grand winning opening V16);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) in which a game ball entering the variable winning opening can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2), the second identification information display unit (for example, The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display section B21g). Control means MP11-C);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first special game control means (for example, the special game control) for executing the first special game which may be advantageous to the player Means MP30);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening V16) from the closed state to the open state. A variable winning opening game control means to be executed (for example, a small hit game control means MP40);
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
A specific game in which a ball is easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1 and the second main game starting port (2) B10-2) than in the normal game state and the normal game state. And a game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling to take either a normal game state or a specific game state,
The variable display of the second identification information can be started even during the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the first identification information can be started even during the variable display of the second identification information. And
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or, the first identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured to be stop-displayed in the stop display mode and belongs to the specific group,
The first variation pattern table and the first variation pattern table are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table is different from the first variation pattern table in the tendency of selecting the variation display time of the second identification information. Having at least a first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table and a second variation period state referring to the second variation pattern table,
When the first special information and the second special game are not executed when stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed, or when the second identification information is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed. One unit is that neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed,
When the normal gaming state and the first variable period state are entered after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, the one unit is predetermined from the time of the normal gaming state and the first variable period state. After performing the number of times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state and the second fluctuation period state,
The probability that the specific game state will be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game due to the first identification information being stopped and the first special game due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the probability of being in a specific game state after execution of a special game or a second special game is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (14)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port (1) B10-1, a second main game starting port (2) B10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a grand winning opening V16);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) in which a game ball entering the variable winning opening can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2), the second identification information display unit (for example, The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display section B21g). Control means MP11-C);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first special game control means (for example, the special game control) for executing the first special game which may be advantageous to the player Means MP30);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening V16) from the closed state to the open state. A variable winning opening game control means to be executed (for example, a small hit game control means MP40);
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
The variable display of the second identification information can be started even during the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the first identification information can be started even during the variable display of the second identification information. And
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or, the first identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured to be stop-displayed in the stop display mode and belongs to the specific group,
The first variation pattern table and the first variation pattern table are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table is different from the first variation pattern table in the tendency of selecting the variation display time of the second identification information. Having at least a first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table and a second variation period state referring to the second variation pattern table,
After the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, it is configured to be any of the first variable period state and the second variable period state,
Due to the second identification information being stopped and displayed, rather than the probability of being in the second variable period state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game due to the stop display of the first identification information A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the probability of entering the second variable period state after execution of the first special game or the second special game is higher.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (15)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port (1) B10-1, a second main game starting port (2) B10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a grand winning opening V16);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) in which a game ball entering the variable winning opening can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2), the second identification information display unit (for example, The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display section B21g). Control means MP11-C);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first special game control means (for example, the special game control) for executing the first special game which may be advantageous to the player Means MP30);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening V16) from the closed state to the open state. A variable winning opening game control means to be executed (for example, a small hit game control means MP40);
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
A specific game in which a ball is easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1 and the second main game starting port (2) B10-2) than in the normal game state and the normal game state. And a game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling to take either a normal game state or a specific game state,
Control so that the suspension does not occur based on the ball entering the second main game start port (2) B10-2),
The variable display of the second identification information can be started even during the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the first identification information can be started even during the variable display of the second identification information. And
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or, the first identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured to be stop-displayed in the stop display mode and belongs to the specific group,
The first variation pattern table and the first variation pattern table are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information, and the second variation pattern table is different from the first variation pattern table in the tendency of selecting the variation display time of the second identification information. Having at least a first variation period state referring to the first variation pattern table and a second variation period state referring to the second variation pattern table,
When the first special information and the second special game are not executed when stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed, or when the second identification information is stopped and displayed after being variably displayed. One unit is that neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed,
When the normal gaming state and the first variable period state are entered after the execution of the first special game or the second special game is completed, the one unit is predetermined from the time of the normal gaming state and the first variable period state. After performing the number of times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state and the second fluctuation period state,
After the execution of the first special game or the second special game, the specific game state is set, and then the one unit is performed one or more times to enter the normal game state and the first variable period state. After the one unit has been performed a specific number of times, counting from the time when the single fluctuation period state is reached, the normal game state and the second fluctuation period state are configured,
When the normal gaming state and the second variable period state are entered, after the unit is performed a specified number of times from the time when the normal gaming state and the second variable period state are entered, the normal gaming state is returned again. A pachinko game machine configured to be in a first variable period state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (16)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port (1) B10-1, a second main game starting port (2) B10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a grand winning opening V16);
A specific area (for example, a V winning opening C26) in which a game ball entering the variable winning opening can enter;
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2), the second identification information display unit (for example, The second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbols) for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second main game symbol display section B21g). Control means MP11-C);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the first special game control means (for example, the special game control) for executing the first special game which may be advantageous to the player Means MP30);
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening V16) from the closed state to the open state. A variable winning opening game control means to be executed (for example, a small hit game control means MP40);
The second special game control means for executing the second special game which is advantageous to the player when the variable winning opening game is executed and the ball enters the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). (For example, special game control means MP30),
A specific game in which a ball is easier to enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1 and the second main game starting port (2) B10-2) than in the normal game state and the normal game state. And a game state control means (for example, a specific game control means MP50) for controlling to take either a normal game state or a specific game state,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. Or, the first identification information is not stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, while the second identification information is configured to be stop-displayed in the stop display mode and belongs to the specific group,
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are not being displayed in a variable manner, and the first special game, the second special game, and the variable winning opening opening game are not being executed, the normal game state and the second start If there is a ball in the mouth (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2), the second starting port (for example, 2 The main game start port (1) B10-1 and the second main game start port (2) B10-2) are configured to be determined to be abnormal.
After it is determined that the entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2) is abnormal, the first identification information is obtained. The second start port (for example, the second main game start port (1) B10-1 and the second main game start port (2) B10-2) is entered again before the change display of the predetermined number of times is started. It is configured to give a predetermined error notification when there is a ball,
The predetermined number of times is configured to be larger than an upper limit number related to a hold that occurs based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10),
After it is determined that the entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port (1) B10-1, the second main game starting port (2) B10-2) is abnormal, the first identification information is obtained. Before the start of the variable display or before the predetermined standby screen is displayed on the predetermined information output unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the entry into the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C26). A pachinko gaming machine characterized by performing a predetermined error notification when a ball is found.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (17) is:
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identifying information is variably displayed on the second identifying information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is performed until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined time has elapsed. ), A special game A control means (for example, a small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game A for executing a unit game once which can be in an advantageous state for the player;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is performed until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a specific time has elapsed. ), A special game B control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game B for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the unit advantageous for the player,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
Easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state A and easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state B Are configured to have the same gender,
When a game ball is fired toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the unit time per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed The number of game balls fired becomes the first number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
In the lottery state B, the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, and the execution of the special game B is defined as one unit, and the one unit is continuously determined. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to be in the lottery state A after the execution of the special game B when the number of times has been performed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (18)
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2);
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
Based on the ball entering the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port (2) A10-2), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) performs the first identification. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after variably displaying information;
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identifying information is variably displayed on the second identifying information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning prize) is provided until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game A control means (for example, a small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game A for once executing a unit game which can make the mouth C20) an advantageous state for the player;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, the first grand prize) until a predetermined number of entering balls or a specific time elapses. Special game B control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game B for executing the unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth C10) an advantageous state for the player,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
Easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state A and easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state B Are configured to have the same gender,
When a game ball is fired toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the unit time per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed The number of game balls fired becomes the first number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
It has a ball entry state A and a ball entry state B that makes it easier to enter the first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port (2) A10-2) than the ball entry state A. And one of the ball entry states B,
Stop display in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the specific group when in the lottery state B and the ball entry state A or in the lottery state A and the ball entry state B or in the lottery state B and the ball entry state B When the execution of the special game B is stopped and displayed in the mode and the execution of the special game B is defined as one unit, and the one unit is continuously performed a predetermined number of times, the lottery state A and the entering ball state are performed after the execution of the special game B is completed. A is a pachinko gaming machine configured to be A.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the concept (19) is:
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a special winning opening C10);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
The first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the first identification information after
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identifying information is variably displayed on the second identifying information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is performed until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined time has elapsed. ), A special game A control means (for example, a small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game A for executing a unit game once which can be in an advantageous state for the player;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, a special winning opening C10) is performed until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a specific time has elapsed. ), A special game B control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game B for executing a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the unit advantageous for the player,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
Easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state A and easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state B Are configured to have the same gender,
When a game ball is fired toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the unit time per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed The number of game balls fired becomes the first number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
At the time of execution of the special game B, at least a part of the opening / closing manner of the variable winning opening (for example, the special winning opening C10) when the unit game of a certain execution time is executed once, and the execution of the special game A A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the opening / closing mode of a variable winning port (for example, a special winning port C10) when a unit game is executed once is substantially the same.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (20)
A first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10-1, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2) into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state (for example, a first winning opening C10, a second winning opening C20);
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g);
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information,
Based on a ball entering a first starting port (for example, a first main game starting port (1) A10-1, a first main game starting port (2) A10-2), a first identification information display unit (for example, First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbols) for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first main game symbol display section A21g). Control means MP11-C);
Based on the ball entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second identifying information is variably displayed on the second identifying information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information after the
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a variable winning opening (for example, a second winning prize) is provided until a predetermined number of balls have been entered or a predetermined time has elapsed. A special game A control means (for example, a small hit game control means MP40) capable of executing a special game A for once executing a unit game which can make the mouth C20) an advantageous state for the player;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a variable winning opening (for example, the first grand prize) until a predetermined number of entering balls or a specific time elapses. Special game B control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game B for executing the unit game a plurality of times that can make the mouth C10) an advantageous state for the player,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
Easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state A and easy entry into the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) in the lottery state B Are configured to have the same gender,
When a game ball is fired toward a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the unit time per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed The number of game balls fired becomes the first number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, and in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B, The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per unit time during the period in which the special game B is not executed is the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
In the lottery state B, the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, and the execution of the special game B is defined as one unit, and the one unit is continuously determined. If the number of times has been performed, the lottery state A is configured after the end of the execution of the special game B,
After the end of the execution of the special game B executed due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, the second identification information is displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group. After the execution of the special game B, which is executed due to the stop display, the lottery state B and the change state B are relatively easily set after the execution of the special game B is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by the following.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B, second main game start port entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game start Mouth ball judging means MJ11-C10 First big winning hole ball judging means, MJ11-C20 Second big winning hole ball judging means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment executing means, MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition judgment executing means MJ21 -B 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main Game symbol holding means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32-B Second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B 2 main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol hold means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 success / fail lottery means MN11-A first main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-A 1st main game winning / losing lottery table MN11-B 2nd main game winning / losing lottery means, MN11ta-B 2nd main game winning / losing lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game yes / no lottery means, MN11ta-H Table MN20 Special game shift determination means, MN40 symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41 aH Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Variation mode determination means, MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B Second main game variation mode Determination means MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MP Game progress means, MP10 Display control means MP11-C First -Second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C First and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP20-B Second main game Starting port electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game starting port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP22t-B Second main game start port electric accessory opening timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C Big winning opening electric accessory opening and closing Control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 positive change end condition judgment means MP52 time saving end condition judgment means , MP52c Time-saving counter MP53 Limited frequency control means, MP53c Limited frequency counter MB Game state temporary storage means, MB10-C First and second main game state temporary storage means MB11b-C First and second main game symbol information temporary storage Means, MB10-H auxiliary play State temporary storage means MB11b-H Auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means, B20b Special game-related information temporary storage means MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means, MT information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH Prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port incoming ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold Display part B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entrance ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2 main game symbol display section B21h 2nd main game symbol hold display section C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals, C10 large winning opening C11s large winning opening Outgoing device, C11d Large winning opening electric accessory H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start opening H11s Auxiliary game start opening ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game design display H21g Auxiliary game design display, H21h Auxiliary game design hold display Part S Sub-control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main-side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative design display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b installation diagram related information temporary storage means , SM21t Schematic variation time management timer SM22 Schematic pending information display control means, SM22b Schematic pending information temporary storage means SM23 Background effect display control means, SM23n Background effect display content determination means SM23b Background effect related information temporary memory means, SM24 Notice Effect display control means SM24n Notice effect display content determining means, SM24b Notice effect relevant information temporary storage means SM25 Reach effect display control means, SM25n Reach effect display content determiner SM25b Reach effect relevant information temporary storage means, SM25ta Outgoing content determination table SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub-control unit), SS10 sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decorative pattern Display area, SG12 First hold display section SG13 Second hold display section KH Award ball payout control board KE Award ball payout device

Claims (1)

The first starting port where game balls can enter,
A second starting port into which game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information,
First identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the first identification information after variably displaying the first identification information in the first identification information display unit based on the ball entering the first starting port,
A second identification information display control unit that controls to stop display the second identification information after variably displaying the second identification information in the second identification information display unit based on the ball entering the second starting port,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, a state in which the variable winning opening is advantageous for the player until there is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined time has elapsed. Special game A control means capable of executing a special game A that executes a unit game once,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, a state in which the variable winning opening is advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls or a specific time has elapsed. Special game B control means capable of executing a special game B for executing a unit game a plurality of times,
The probability that the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher than the probability that the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group. Or, the first identification information is configured not to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, while the second identification information is configured to be stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
A lottery state A and a lottery state B in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group is higher than the lottery state A; B is configured to take any of
The variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table A are referred to when determining the variation display time of the second identification information. And is configured to be able to adopt any one of the fluctuation state A referring to the fluctuation pattern table A and the fluctuation state B referring to the fluctuation pattern table B,
It is configured such that the ease of entering the second starting port in the lottery state A and the ease of entering the second starting port in the lottery state B are the same,
Even during the variable display of the first identification information, the variable display of the second identification information can be started, and even during the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the first identification information can be started,
In the case where game balls are fired toward the second starting port at a predetermined firing intensity and a predetermined firing interval, the number of game balls fired per unit time during a period in which the special game B is not executed is the first number. ,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, when the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A are present, the unit during the period in which the special game B is not executed The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per time becomes the second number,
When the game ball is fired toward the second starting port at the predetermined firing intensity and the predetermined firing interval, when the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B are present, the unit during the period in which the special game B is not executed. The expected value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the execution of the special game A per time becomes the third number,
While the second number is smaller than the first number, the third number is configured to be larger than the first number,
After the lottery state B and the fluctuating state B, the special game A is executed to the player until the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the lottery state B and the fluctuating state B. The expected value related to the number of awarded balls to be given is executed based on that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B. It is configured not to exceed the maximum value related to the number of prize balls given to the player by the special game B ,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the lottery state A and the fluctuation state A, the variable display time of the second identification information is the second identification information in the lottery state B and the fluctuation state B. Is configured to be relatively longer than the variable display time of the second identification information when stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group during the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the second identification information is forcibly stopped. A pachinko machine.

Images